Asus P4P800 DELUXE User Manual
Motherboard P4P800 Deluxe User Guide
ii Copyright © 2003 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (âASUSâ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modified or altered, unless such repair , modification of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âAS ISâ WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECT ORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DA T A, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . SPECIFICA TIONS AND INFORMA TION CONT AINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT T O CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THA T MA Y APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTW ARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the ownersâ benefit, without intent to infringe. E1323 Revised Edition V3 May 2003
iii FCC/CDC statements ..................................................................... vi Safety information ......................................................................... vii About this guide ............................................................................ viii How this guide is organized ................................................ viii Conventions used in this guide ............................................. ix Where to find more information ............................................. ix ASUS contact information ............................................................... x P4P800 Deluxe specifications summary ........................................ xi Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 W elcome! ........................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ............................................................... 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................. 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights .................................................. 1-2 1.3.2 V alue-added solutions ............................................ 1-6 1.4 Motherboard overview ........................................................ 1-7 1.4.1 Major components ................................................. 1-7 1.4.2 Core specifications ................................................ 1-9 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.1 Motherboard installation ..................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Placement direction ............................................... 2-1 2.1.2 Screw holes ........................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard layout ............................................................ 2-2 2.3 Before you proceed ............................................................ 2-3 2.4 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ........................................... 2-4 2.4.1 Overview ................................................................ 2-4 2.4.2 Installing the CPU .................................................. 2-5 2.4.3 Installing the heatsink and fan ............................... 2-7 2.4.4 Connecting the CPU fan cable .............................. 2-9 2.5 System memory ............................................................... 2-10 2.5.1 Overview .............................................................. 2-10 2.5.2 Memory configurations ......................................... 2-1 1 2.5.3 Installing a DIMM ................................................. 2-14 2.5.4 Removing a DIMM ............................................... 2-14 2.6 Expansion slots ................................................................ 2-15 2.6.1 Installing an expansion card ................................ 2-15 2.6.2 Configuring an expansion card ............................ 2-15 2.6.3 PCI slots .............................................................. 2-17 2.6.4 AGP slot ............................................................... 2-18 2.6.5 WiFi slot ............................................................... 2-19 2.7 Jumpers ............................................................................ 2-20 2.8 Connectors ....................................................................... 2-23 Contents
iv Chapter 3: Powering up 3.1 Starting up for the first time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 V ocal POST Messages ...................................................... 3-2 3.3 Powering of f the computer ................................................. 3-4 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS .................................... 4-1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk ............................. 4-1 4.1.2 Using AFUDOS to update the BIOS ...................... 4-1 4.1.3 Using AFUDOS to copy BIOS from PC ................. 4-3 4.1.4 Using ASUS EZ Flash to update the BIOS ............ 4-4 4.1.5 Recovering the BIOS with CrashFree BIOS 2 ....... 4-5 4.2 BIOS Setup program .......................................................... 4-7 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ................................................ 4-8 4.2.2 Menu bar ................................................................ 4-8 4.2.3 Navigation keys ..................................................... 4-8 4.2.4 Menu items ............................................................ 4-9 4.2.5 Sub-menu items ..................................................... 4-9 4.2.6 Configuration fields ................................................ 4-9 4.2.7 Pop-up window ...................................................... 4-9 4.2.8 Scroll bar ................................................................ 4-9 4.2.9 General help .......................................................... 4-9 4.3 Main menu ........................................................................ 4-10 4.3.1 System T ime [xx:xx:xxxx] ..................................... 4-10 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] ............................. 4-10 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] ....................... 4-10 4.3.4 Language [English] .............................................. 4-10 4.3.5 Primary and Secondary IDE Master/Slave; Third ....... and Fourth IDE Master ......................................... 4-1 1 4.3.6 IDE Configuration ................................................ 4-12 4.3.7 System Information .............................................. 4-14 4.4 Advanced menu ............................................................... 4-15 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration ................................... 4-15 4.4.2 CPU Configuration ............................................... 4-18 4.4.3 Chipset ................................................................. 4-18 4.4.4 Onboard Devices Configuration ........................... 4-20 4.4.5 PCI PnP ............................................................... 4-22 4.4.6 USB Configuration ............................................... 4-23 4.4.7 Speech Configuration .......................................... 4-25 4.4.8 Instant Music Configuration ................................. 4-26 4.5 Power menu ..................................................................... 4-27 4.5.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] .......................................... 4-27 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] ....................... 4-27 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ......................................... 4-27 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ............................. 4-27 4.5.5 BIOS -> AML ACPI T able [Enabled] ..................... 4-27 Contents
v Contents 4.5.6 APM Configuration ............................................... 4-28 4.5.7 Hardware Monitor ................................................ 4-30 4.6 Boot menu ........................................................................ 4-32 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority ............................................. 4-32 4.6.2 Hard disk drives ................................................... 4-33 4.6.3 Boot Settings Configuration ................................. 4-33 4.6.4 Security ................................................................ 4-35 4.7 Exit menu ......................................................................... 4-37 Chapter 5: Software support 5.1 Install an operating system ................................................. 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ...................................................... 5-1 5.2.1 Running the support CD ........................................ 5-1 5.2.2 Drivers menu ......................................................... 5-2 5.2.3 Utilities menu ......................................................... 5-3 5.2.4 ASUS Contact Information ..................................... 5-4 5.2.5 Other information ................................................... 5-5 5.3 Software information .......................................................... 5-7 5.3.1 ASUS Update ........................................................ 5-7 5.3.2 ASUS MyLogo2⢠.................................................. 5-8 5.3.3 ASUS PC Probe .................................................. 5-10 5.3.4 ASUS Instant Music ............................................. 5-14 5.3.5 Winbond V oice Editor .......................................... 5-17 5.3.6 SoundMAX ® 4 XL software .................................. 5-21 5.4 RAID 0/ RAID 1/ RAID 0 1 / JBOD configurations .......... 5-25 5.4.1 Install the hard disks ............................................ 5-26 5.4.2 Enter the VIA ® T ech RAID BIOS utility ................. 5-27 5.4.3 Create Array ......................................................... 5-28 5.4.4 Delete Array ......................................................... 5-32 5.4.5 Create/Delete Spare ............................................ 5-32 5.4.6 Select Boot Array ................................................. 5-33 5.4.7 Serial Number View ............................................. 5-33 5.5 Intel ® RAID for Serial A T A configurations .......................... 5-34 5.5.1 BIOS Configuration .............................................. 5-34 5.5.2 Installing Serial A T A hard disks ............................ 5-34 5.5.3 Creating, Deleting and Resetting RAID sets ........ 5-35 5.5.4 Creating a RAID V olume ...................................... 5-35 5.5.5 Deleting a RAID V olume ...................................... 5-36 5.5.6 Reset RAID Data ................................................. 5-37 5.6 Using Intel ® / VIA ® Makedisk.exe ...................................... 5-38 5.7 Marvell ® Virtual Cable T ester⢠(VCT) T echnology ........... 5-39
vi FCC/CDC st atements Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturer âs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user âs authority to operate this equipment.
vii Safety information Electrical safety ⢠T o prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adpater or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company . ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to fix it by yourself. Contact a qualified service technician or your retailer . Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately . ⢠T o avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry . ⢠A void dust, humidity , and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualified service technician or your retailer .
viii About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing the ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard. How this guide is organized This manual contains the following parts: ⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the P4P800 Deluxe motherboard. It includes brief descriptions of the special attributes of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠Chapter 3: Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence and gives information on the BIOS beep codes. ⢠Chapter 4: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠Chapter 5: Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package.
ix Conventions used in this guide T o make sure that you perform certain tasks properly , take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. Where to find more information Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1. ASUS Websites The ASUS websites worldwide provide updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. The ASUS websites are listed in the ASUS Contact Information on page x. 2. Optional Documentation Y our product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty flyers, that may have been added by your dealer . These documents are not part of the standard package. W ARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. IMPORT ANT : Information that you MUST follow to complete a task. NOTE: T ips and additional information to aid in completing a task.
x ASUS contact infor mation ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (Asia-Pacific) Address: 150 Li-T e Road, Peitou, T aipei, T aiwan 1 12 General T el: 886-2-2894-3447 General Fax: 886-2-2894-3449 General Email: info@asus.com.tw T echnical Support MB/Others (T el): 886-2-2890-7121 (English) Notebook (T el): 886-2-2890-7122 (English) Desktop/Server (T el): 886-2-2890-7123 (English) Support Fax: 886-2-2890-7698 Web Site: www .asus.com.tw ASUS COMPUTER INTERNA TIONAL (America) Address: 44370 Nobel Drive, Fremont, CA 94538, USA General Fax: 1-502-933-8713 General Email: tmd1@asus.com T echnical Support Support Fax: 1-502-933-8713 General Support: 1-502-995-0883 Notebook Support: 1-510-739-3777 x51 10 Web Site: www .asus.com Support Email: tsd@asus.com ASUS COMPUTER GmbH (Germany and Austria) Address: Harkortstr . 25, 40880 Ratingen, BRD, Germany General Email: sales@asuscom.de (for marketing requests only) General Fax: 49-2102-9599-31 T echnical Support Support Hotlines: (Components) 49-2102-9599-0 (Notebook PC) 49-2102-9599-10 Support Fax: 49-2102-9599-1 1 Support Email: www .asuscom.de/kontakt (for online support) Web Site: www .asuscom.de
xi P4P800 Deluxe specifications summar y CPU Chipset Front Side Bus (FSB) Memory Expansion slots IDE RAID IDE / Serial A T A (optional) IEEE 1394 (optional) Audio (optional) LAN (optional) Socket 478 for Intel ® Pentium ® 4 / Celeron up to 3.06 GHz Supports Intel ® Hyper-Threading T echnology Supports Intel ® Prescott CPU North Bridge: Intel 82865PE South Bridge: Intel ICH5R w/ RAID 0 support 800/533/400 MHz Dual-channel memory architecture Supports PC3200/2700/2100 unbuffered non-ECC DDR DIMMs 4 x 184-pin DDR DIMM sockets for up to 4GB memory 1 x AGP 8X (1.5V only) 5 x PCI 1 x WiFi slot Supported by South Bridge (ICH5R) - 2 x UltraDMA100 support for 4 drives - 2 x Serial A T A with RAID 0 function Supported by VIA ® 6410 RAID controller - 2 x UltraDMA 133 connector support for 4 drives with RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 and RAID JBOD VIA 6307 2 x IEEE 1394 ports ADI AD1985 6-channel audio CODEC 1 x S/PDIF out 3COM 3C940 Gbit PCI LAN controller AI BIOS solutions: ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS Q-Fan T echnology ASUS POST Reporter⢠Intelligent CPU frequency tuner ASUS JumperFree Adjustable CPU V CORE , memory and AGP voltages SFS (Stepless Frequency Selection) from 100MHz to 400MHz at 1MHz increments C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) ASUS MyLogo 2 Instant Music ASUS EZ Flash Multi-language BIOS (continued on the next page) CPU Chipset Front Side Bus (FSB) Memory Expansion slots Storage IEEE 1394 AI Audio AI Net AI BIOS AI Overclocking Special features
xii Special features Rear panel I/O Internal I/O BIOS features Industry standard Manageability Form Factor Support CD contents P4P800 Deluxe specifications summar y Rear Panel I/O Internal I/O BIOS features Industry standard Manageability Form Factor Support CD contents * Specifications are subject to change without notice. 1 x Parallel port 1 x Serial ports 1 x PS/2 keyboard port 1 x PS/2 mouse port 4 x USB 2.0/USB 1.1 ports 1 x RJ-45 port (optional) 1 x S/PDIF-out port 1 x IEEE 1394 port Line In/Line Out/Microphone ports 2 x USB 2.0/1.1 connector for 4 additional USB ports CPU/Chassis/Power fan connectors 20-pin/4-pin A TX 12V power connectors Chassis intrusion 1 x IEEE 1394 connectors GAME connector S/PDIF out connector CD/AUX/Modem audio connectors Front panel audio connector COM2 connector 4Mb Flash ROM, AMI BIOS, PnP , DMI2.0, ACPI, SM BIOS2.3, CrashFree BIOS 2, Multi-language BIOS, ASUS EZ Flash, ASUS MyLogo2, ASUS Instant Music USB 2.0, PCI 2.2 (PCI 2.3) DMI 2.0, WOL/WOR by PME, WO_USB, WO_KB/MS, chassis intrusion A TX form factor: 12 in x 9.6 in Device drivers ASUS PC Probe ASUS LiveUpdate T rend Micro⢠PC-cillin 2002 anti-virus software
Chapter 1 This chapter describes the features of the P4P800 Deluxe motherboard. It includes brief explanations of the special attributes of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. Product introduction
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard Chapter summar y 1.1 Welcome! ........................................................ 1-1 1.2 Package contents .......................................... 1-1 1.3 Special features ............................................. 1-2 1.4 Motherboard overview ................................... 1-7
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 1-1 1 . 1 Welcome! 1 .2 Package contents Check your P4P800 Deluxe package for the following items. Thank you for buying the ASUS ® P4P800 Deluxe motherboard! The ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! The P4P800 Deluxe incorporates the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 Processor in 478- pin package coupled with Intel ® 82865PE and ICH5R chipsets that support the fastest 800MHz FSB to set a new benchmark for an effective desktop platform solution. Supporting up to 4GB of system memory with PC3200/2700/2100 DDR SDRAM, high-resolution graphics via an AGP 8X slot, Serial A T A support, RAID, IEEE 1394, USB 2.0, and 6-channel audio features, the P4P800 Deluxe is your perfect tool to get ahead in the world of power computing! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below . If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer . ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard ASUS support CD 2 x SA T A cable 80-conductor ribbon cables for UltraDMA/66/100 IDE drives 40-conductor IDE cable Ribbon cable for a 3.5-inch floppy drive I/O shield Bag of extra jumper caps User Guide Quick Reference Card (last page of User Guide) Quick Setup Guide (retail boxes only) Jumpers and Connectors Sticker (retail boxes only) WinDVD Suite software Instant Music keyboard label (retail boxes only)
1-2 Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3 Special features 1.3.1 Product highlights Latest processor technology The P4P800 Deluxe motherboard supports the latest Intel ® Pentium ® 4 / Celeron Processor via a 478-pin surface mount ZIF socket. The Pentium 4 processor with 512KB L2 cache on 0.13 micron processor includes a 800/ 533/400 MHz system bus and the FMB2 power design that allows up to 3.06 GHz core frequencies and Intel ® Prescott CPU when available. See page 2-4 for more information. Dual Channel DDR memory support Employing the dual channel Double Data Rate (DDR) memory architecture, the P4P800 Deluxe motherboard supports up to 4GB of system memory using PC3200/2700/PC2100 DDR DIMMs. The ultra-fast 400MHz memory bus that delivers the required bandwidth for the latest multimedia, internet, and 3D graphics applications. See page 2-10. Serial A T A solution, RAID 0 support The motherboard supports two interfaces compliant to the Serial A T A (SA T A) specification, an evolutionary replacement of the Parallel A T A storage interface. The Serial A T A specification allows for thinner , more flexible cables with lower pin count, reduced voltage requirement, up to 150 MB/s data transfer rate. With the Intel ® ICH5R controller onboard, the motherboard supports RAID 0 configuration using SA T A drives. Ai NET solution The Ai Series supports Gigabit LAN by integrating the 3Com ® 3C940 controller , equipped with a unique net-diagnosing utility - VCT (V irtual Cable T ester). VCT intelligently diagnoses and reports cable faults from a remote location up to 100 meters and helps users improve network quality . See page 5-39. AGP 8X support AGP 8X (AGP 3.0) is the next generation VGA interface specification that enables enhanced graphics performance with high bandwidth speeds up to 2.12 GB/s.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 1-3 Ai Audio solution The SoundMAX-class ADI AD1985 AC â97 audio CODEC supports 6-channel 5.1 surround sound output, stereo microphone input, variable sample rate conversion (SRC), professional quality 103-dB out put with 94-dB SNR, and analog enumeration capability . The SoundMAX 4 XL software features the AudioESP⢠(Audio Enumeration and Sensing Process) that allows intelligent detection of the peripherals plugged into the audio ports and identifies the incompatible devices, if any . See page 5-21 Ai BIOS solution The Ai BIOS is a combination of three ASUS intelligent solutions: CrashFree BIOS2, Q-Fan technology and POST Reporter . Dual Channel UltraA T A 133 RAID support This motherboard incorporates the high-performance VIA ® VT6410 IDE RAID controller , which supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 and JBOD for a balance of hard disk performance and data protection. IEEE 1394 support The IEEE 1394 interface provides high-speed and flexible PC connectivity to a wide range of peripherals and devices compliant to IEEE 1394a standards. The IEEE 1394 interface allows up to 400Mbps transfer rates through simple, low-cost, high-bandwidth asynchronous (real-time) data interfacing between computers, peripherals, and consumer electronic devices such as camcorders, VCRs, printers,TVs, and digital cameras. See page 2-32. USB 2.0 technology The motherboard implements the new Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 specification, extending the connection speed from 12 Mbps on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0 - supporting up to 8 USB 2.0 ports. The higher bandwidth of USB 2.0 allows connection of devices such as high resolution video conferencing cameras, next generation scanners and printers, and fast storage units. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. See page 2-30.
1-4 Chapter 1: Product introduction C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) The C.P .R. feature of the motherboard BIOS allows automatic re-setting to the BIOS default settings in case the system hangs due to overclocking. When the system hangs due to overclocking, C.P .R. eliminates the need to open the system chassis and clear the RTC data. Simply shut down and reboot the system, and BIOS automatically restores the CPU default setting for each parameter . ASUS POST Reporter P4P800 Deluxe offers a new exciting feature called the ASUS POST Reporter to provide friendly voice messages and alerts during the Power- On Self-T ests (POST). Through an added external speaker , you will hear the messages informing you of the system boot status and causes of boot errors, if any . The bundled Winbond V oice Editor software allows you to customize the voice messages, and provides multi-language support. ASUS MyLogo2⢠This new feature present in the P4P800 Deluxe motherboard allows you to personalize and add style to your system with customizable boot logos. See details on pages 4-34 and 5-8. ASUS Multi-language BIOS The multi-language BIOS allows you to select the language of your choice from the available options. The localized BIOS menus allow you to configure easier and faster . Visit the ASUS website for information on the supported languages. ASUS EZ Flash BIOS With the ASUS EZ Flash, you can easily update the system BIOS even before loading the operating system. No need to use a DOS-based utility or boot from a floppy disk. See details on page 4-4.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 1-5 AI Overclocking This feature allows convenient overclocking up to 30% (depending on the installed CPU and DRAM) to enhance system performance while still maintaining system stability . See section â4.4.1 JumperFree Configurationâ to set the BIOS items for overclocking. ASUS Q-Fan technology The ASUS Q-Fan technology smartly adjusts the fan speeds according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efficient operation. See details on page 4-30. CrashFree BIOS 2 This feature allows you to restore the original BIOS data from the ASUS support CD in case when the BIOS codes and data are corrupted. This protection eliminates the need to buy a replacement ROM chip. See details on page 4-5. ASUS J-Panel This optional device is designed for ASUS motherboards with USB, S/PDIF or Intel Front Panel audio connector for additional front I/O connectors. Instant Music This unique feature allows you to playback audio files even without booting the system to Windowsâ¢. Just press the ASUS Instant Music special function keys and enjoy the music! See details on page 5-14.
1-6 Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3.2 V alue-added solutions Overclocking ⢠adjustable CPU frequency multiple in BIOS using the ASUS JumperFree⢠solution ⢠C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) ⢠adjustable CPU V CORE , and DDR memory and AGP voltages ⢠Stepless Frequency Selection (SFS) for fine-tuning system bus frequency from 100MHz up to 400MHz at 1MHz increments T emperature, fan, and voltage monitoring The CPU temperature is monitored by the Winbond ASIC to prevent overheating and damage. The system fan rotations per minute (RPM) is monitored for timely failure detection. The system voltage levels are monitored to ensure stable supply of current for critical components. Chassis intrusion detection The motherboard supports chassis intrusion monitoring through the Winbond ASIC. A chassis intrusion event is retained in CMOS for more protection. ASUS update This utility allows you to update the motherboard BIOS through a user- friendly interface. Connect to the Internet then to the ASUS FTP site nearest you to obtain the latest BIOS version for your motherboard.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 1-7 1 .4 Motherboard over vie w Before you install the P4P800 Deluxe motherboard, familiarize yourself with its physical configuration and available features to facilitate the motherboard installation and future upgrades. A sufficient knowledge of the motherboard specifications will also help you avoid mistakes that may damage the board and its components. 1.4.1 Major components The following are the major components of the P4P800 Deluxe motherboard as pointed out in the picture on page 1-7. 1. A TX 12V connector 2. CPU socket 3. North Bridge controller 4. DDR DIMM sockets 5. A TX Power connector 6. Super I/O controller 7. Floppy disk connector 8. IDE connectors 9. AGP slot 10. Serial A T A connectors 1 1. Speech Controller 12. RAID Ultra A T A/133 connector 13. Flash ROM 14. South Bridge controller 15. A T A133 RAID controller 16. Standby Power LED 17. WiFi slot 18. 1394 controller 19. PCI slots 20. Audio CODEC 21. Gigabit LAN controller 22. PS/2 Mouse 23 Parallel port 24. IEEE 1394 port 25. RJ-45 port 26. Line In jack 27. Line Out jack 28. Microphone jack 29. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4 30. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 31. Serial port 32. S/PDIF output port 33. Keyboard port See page 1-8 for the specifications of each component. Refer to Chapter 2 for detailed information on the components.
1-8 Chapter 1: Product introduction 4 3 21 2 14 15 18 5 8 13 12 19 20 1 7 9 16 1 0 6 11 17 22 33 2 6 2 7 2 8 29 23 25 31 32 24 30
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 1-9 A TX 12V connector . This power connector connects the 4-pin 12V plug from the A TX 12V power supply . CPU socket. A 478-pin surface mount, Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) socket for the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 Processor (and Intelâs future Prescott CPU) support with 800/ 533/400 MHz system bus that allows u p to 6.4 GB/s data transfer rates. North bridge controller . The Intel ® 82865PE Memory Controller Hub (MCH) provides the processor interface with 800/533/400 MHz frequency , system memory interface at 400/333 /266 MHz operation, and 1.5V AGP interface that supports AGP 3 .0 specification including 8X Fast Write protocol. DDR DIMM sockets. These four 184-pin DIMM sockets support up to 4GB system memory using unbuffered non-ECC PC 3200/2700/2100 DDR DIMMs. A TX power connector . This 20-pin connector connects to an A TX 12V power supply . The power supply must have at least 1A on the 5V standby lead ( 5VSB). Super I/O controller . The Winbond 83627THF Low Pin Count (LPC) interface provides the commonly used Super I/O functionality . The chipset supports a high-performance floppy disk controller for a 360K/ 720K/1.44M/2.88M floppy disk drive, a multi-mode parallel port, two serial ports, a GAME port, the mouse and keyboard interface an d the LPC (Low Pin Count) interface. Floppy disk connector . This connector accommodates the provided ribbon cable for the floppy disk drive. One side of the connector is slotted to prevent incorrect insertion of the floppy disk cable. IDE connectors. These dual-channel bus master IDE connectors support Ultra DMA100/66, PIO Modes 3 & 4 IDE devices. Both the primary (blue) and secondary (black) connectors are slotted to prevent incorrect insertion of the IDE ribbon cable. AGP slot. This Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP) slot supports 1.5V AGP8X mode graphics cards for 3D graphical applications. Serial A T A connectors. These two 7-pin connectors accommodate the thin cables for Serial A T A devices. Speech Controller . T he W inbond 83791S W55F10 facilitates the POST speech functionality . 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1.4.2 Core specifications 11 10
1-10 Chapter 1: Product introduction RAID connector . These dual-channel bus master IDE connectors support Ultra DMA/13 3 IDE devices. These connectors are slotted to prevent incorrect insertion of the IDE ribbon cable. Flash ROM. This 4Mb firmware contains the programmable BIOS program. South bridge controller . T he Intel ® ICH5R is a subsystem that integrates various I/O functions including 2-channel A T A100 bus master IDE controller , S A T A RAID controller , up t o eight USB 2.0/1.1 ports, I/O APIC, ACâ97 2.2 interface, and PCI 2.3 interface. A T A133 RAID controller . The V IA ® VT6410 IDE RAID controller provides high performance RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 and JBOD RAID methods. Standby power LED. This LED lights up if there is a standby power on the motherboard. This LED acts as a reminder to turn of f the system power before plugging or unplugging devices. Wi-Fi slot. The Wi-Fi ( Wi reless Fi delity) slot connects a wireless networking module that allows 1 1Mbps transmission (with a fallback to 5.5, 2, and 1 Mbps) in the 2.4 GHz band. Wi-Fi networks use radio technologies known as IEEE 802.1 1b to provide a fast reliable wireless connectivity . IEEE 1394 controller . The V IA ® 6307 controller supports IEEE 1394 functionality with maximum data transfer rates of 400 Mbps. PCI slots. These five 32-bit PCI 2.3 expansion slots support bus master PCI cards like SCSI or LAN cards with 133MB/s maximum throughput. Audio CODEC. The ADI AD1985 is an ACâ97 CODEC that allows 6-channel audio playback. The audio CODEC provides six DAC channels for 5.1 surround sound, S/PDIF output, AUX and Line In stereo inputs, integrated headphone amplifier , greater than 90dB dynamic range with the jack sense and jack enumeration feature. LAN controller . The 3Com ® 3C940 Gigabit Ethernet is a single-chip solution for LAN on Motherboard (LOM) application. The 3C940 provides a 32-bit interface and supports 1000/100/10 Mbps data transfer rates. PS/2 mouse port. This green 6-pin connector is for a PS/2 mouse. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 21
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 1-11 Parallel port. This 25-pin port connects a parallel printer , a scanner , or other devices. IEEE1394 port. This 6-pin IEEE 1394 port provides high-speed connectivity for audio/video devices, storage peripherals, other PCs and/or portable devices. RJ-45 port. This port allows connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Line In jack. This Line In (light blue) jack connects a tape player or other audio sources. In 6-channel mode, the function of this jack becomes Rear Speaker Out. Line Out jack. This Line Out (lime) jack connects a headphone or a speaker . In 6-channel mode, the function of this jack becomes Front Speaker Out. Microphone jack. This Mic (pink) jack connects a microphone. In 6- channel mode, the function of this jack becomes Bass/Center Speaker Out. 25 26 27 28 32 29 30 31 23 24 33 USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 . These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. Serial port. This 9-pin COM1 port is for pointing devices or other serial devices. S/PDIF jack. This jack connects to external audio output devices. PS/2 keyboard port. This purple connector is for a PS/2 keyboard.
1-12 Chapter 1: Product introduction
Chapter 2 Hardware information This chapter describes the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes details on the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard Chapter summar y 2.1 Motherboard installation ............................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard layout ....................................... 2-2 2.3 Before you proceed ....................................... 2-3 2.4 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ..................... 2-4 2.5 System memory ........................................... 2-10 2.6 Expansion slots ........................................... 2-15 2.7 Jumpers ........................................................ 2-20 2.8 Connectors ................................................... 2-23
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-1 2. 1 Motherboard ins tallation Before you install the motherboard, study the configuration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard fits into it. The P4P800 Deluxe uses the A TX form factor that measures 12 inches x 9.6 inches. 2.1.1 Placement direction When installing the motherboard, make sure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below . 2.1.2 Screw holes Place nine (9) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. Place this side towards the rear of the chassis Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so may damage the motherboard. Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components.
2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2 Motherboard layout PCI1 P ANEL1 P4P800 ® CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power CD1 AUX1 Super I/O 4Mbit Firmware Hub PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: Ke yboard Below:Mic In Center:Line Out T op:Line In Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP1) CPU_F AN FP_AUDIO Audio Codec USB2.0 T : USB4 B: USB3 T op: RJ-45 GAME1 Socket 478 A TX12V1 CHASSIS1 DDR DIMM_B1 (64 bit,184-pin module) PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 PCI5 IE1394_2 CLRTC1 FLOPPY1 PRI_IDE1 SEC_IDE1 P ARALLEL PORT COM1 SPDIF_O SPDIF_OUT A TX Power Connector DDR DIMM_A1 (64 bit,184-pin module) DDR DIMM_A2 (64 bit,184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B2 (64 bit,184-pin module) KBPWR CHA_F AN1 1394 T op: USB1 USB2 Bottom: Intel ICH5R Intel 82865PE Memory Controller Hub 3Com 3C940 Gbit Speech Controller S ATA 1 COM2 USB_56 USB_78 VIA VT6410 Chipset SB_PWR1 SMB20 PWR_F AN1 S ATA 2 VIA VT6307 Chipset PRI_RAID1 TRPWR1 MODEM1 SEC_RAID1 WIFI USBPW12 USBPW34 USBPW56 USBPW78 24.5cm (9.6in) 30.5cm (12.0in)
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-3 2.3 Before you proceed T ake note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. P4P800 ® P4P800 Onboard LED SB_PWR1 ON Standby Power OFF Powere d Off 1. Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. 2. Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or to a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity . 3. Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. 4. Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. 5. Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the A TX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply . Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. When lit, the green LED (SB_PWR1) indicates that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode, a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component.
2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.4.1 Overview The motherboard comes with a surface mount 478-pin Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) socket. The socket is designed for the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 Processor in the 478-pin package with 512KB L2 cache on 0.13 micron process. This processor includes the Intel ® NetBurst⢠micro-architecture that features the rapid execution engine, Intel ® Hyper-Threading T echnology , 800/533/400MHz system bus, and execution trace cache. T ogether , these attributes improve system performance by allowing higher core frequencies, faster execution of integer instructions, and data transfer rates of 6.4GB/s, 4.2GB/s and 3.2GB/s. Note in the illustration that the CPU has a gold triangular mark on one corner . This mark indicates the processor Pin 1 that should match a specific corner of the CPU socket. Gold Mark 2.4 Central Pr ocessing Unit (CPU) Notes on Intel ® Hyper-Threading T echnology T o use the Hyper-Threading T echnology on this motherboard: 1. Buy an Intel Pentium 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . Install the CPU. 2. Power up the system and enter BIOS Setup (see Chapter 4). Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item CPU Configuration-> Hyper-Threading T echnology is set to Enabled. The item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . 3. Reboot the computer . 1. This motherboard supports Intel Pentium 4 CPUs with Hyper- Threading T echnology . 2. Hyper-Threading T echnology is supported under Windows XP and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only . Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compliler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading T echonology item in BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. 3. It is recommended that you install WinXP Service Pack 1. 4. Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. 5. For more information on Hyper-Threading T echnology , visit www .intel.com/info/hyperthreading .
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-5 2.4.2 Installing the CPU Follow these steps to install a CPU. 1. Locate the 478-pin ZIF socket on the motherboard. 2. Unlock the socket by pressing the lever sideways, then lift it up to a 90°-100° angle. Socket Lever 90 - 10 0 Incorrect installation of the CPU into the socket may bend the pins and severely damage the CPU! Make sure that the socket lever is lifted up to 90°-100° angle, otherwise the CPU does not fit in completely .
2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. Position the CPU above the socket such that its marked corner matches the base of the socket lever . 4. Carefully insert the CPU into the socket until it fits in place. 5. When the CPU is in place, push down the socket lever to secure the CPU. The lever clicks on the side tab to indicate that it is locked. Gold Mark The CPU fits only in one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the pins and damaging the CPU!
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-7 2.4.3 Installing the heatsink and fan The Intel ® Pentium ® 4 Processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. Retention Module Base CPU Heatsink Follow these steps to install the CPU heatsink and fan. 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the heatsink fits properly on the retention module base. When you buy a boxed Intel Pentium 4 Processor , the package includes the heatsink, fan, and retention mechanism. In case you buy a CPU separately , make sure that you use only Intel certified heatsink and fan. The retention module base is already installed on the motherboard upon purchase. Y ou do not have to remove the retention module base when installing the CPU or installing other motherboard components. Y our boxed Intel Pentium 4 Processor package should come with installation instructions for the CPU, heatsink, and the retention mechanism. If the instructions in this section do not match the CPU documentation, follow the latter .
2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. Position the fan with the retention mechanism on top of the heatsink. Align and snap the four hooks of the retention mechanism to the holes on each corner of the module base. Retention Hole Retention Hook Snapped to the Retention Hole Retention Lock Make sure that the fan and retention mechanism assembly perfectly fits the heatsink and module base, otherwise you cannot snap the hooks into the holes. Keep the retention locks lifted upward while fitting the retention mechanism to the module base.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-9 2.4.4 Connecting the CPU fan cable When the fan, heatsink, and the retention mechanism are in place, connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_F AN. 3. Push down the locks on the retention mechanism to secure the heatsink and fan to the module base. CPU Fan Connector (CPU_F AN) When secured, the retention locks should point to opposite directions. Donât forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors may occur if you fail to plug this connector .
2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5 System memor y 2.5.1 Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate (DDR) Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) sockets. These sockets support up to 4GB system memory using 184-pin unbuffered non-ECC PC3200/2700/PC2100 DDR DIMMs and allow up to 6.4 GB/s data transfer rate. The following figure illustrates the location of the DDR DIMM sockets. Notes on DDR technology The DDR SDRAM technology evolved from the mainstream PC66, PC100, PC133 memory known as Single Data Rate (SDR) SDRAM. DDR memory however , has the ability to perform two data operations in one clock cycle, thus providing twice the throughput of SDR memory . A DDR DIMM has the same physical dimensions as an SDR DIMM, but it has a 184-pin footprint compared to the 168-pin of the SDR DIMM. Also, a DDR DIMM is single notched while an SDR DIMM is double notched. Therefore, a DDR DIMM is not backward compatible with SDR, and should be installed only in a socket specially designed for DDR DIMMs. P4P800 Deluxe ® P4P800 184-Pin DDR DIMM Sockets 80 Pins 104 Pins DIMM_A 1 DIMM_A 2 DIMM_B 1 DIMM_B 2
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-11 2.5.2 Memory configurations Y ou may install 64MB, 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, and 1GB DDR DIMMs into the DIMM sockets using the memory configurations in this section. Important notes on memory configurations 1. Installing DDR DIMMs other than the recommended configurations may cause memory sizing error or system boot failure. Use any of the recommended configurations in T able 1. 2. In dual-channel configurations, install only identical (the same type and size) DDR DIMM pairs for each channel. 3. Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency . For optimum compatibility , it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor . See list of qualified vendors on page 2-12. 4. Make sure that the memory frequency matches the CPU FSB (Front Side Bus). Refer to T able 2. 5. DIMMs installed into any three sockets will function in single- channel mode. 6. When all four sockets are populated with 1GB DIMMs (total 4GB), the system may detect only 3 GB (a little less than 4GB) due to ICH5R resource allocation. 7. Double-sided DDR DIMMs with X16 (databus width = 16-bit) memory chips are not supported due to chipset limitation. 8. It is recommended to use the blue DIMM slots first.
2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information T able 1 Recommended memory configurations T able 2 Memory frequency/CPU FSB synchronization * Use only identical DDR DIMM pairs. Sockets Mode DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2 Single-channel (1) Populated â â â (2) â Populated â â (3) â â Populated â (4) â â â Populated Dual-channel* (1) Populated â Populated â (2) â Populated â Populated (3) Populated Populated Populated Populated CPU FSB DDR DIMM T ype Memory Frequency 800 MHz PC3200/PC2700*/PC2100 400/333*/266 MHz 533 MHz PC2700/PC2100 333/266 MHz 400 MHz PC2100 266 MHz ⢠*When using 800MHz CPU FSB, PC2700 DDR DIMMs may run only at 320MHz (not 333MHz) due to chipset limitation. ⢠The following FSB/DDR ratios are not supported: 400/333, 400/400, 533/400. ⢠FSB/DDR setting 800/333 is recognized as FSB/DDR 800/320. * For dual-channel configuration (3), you may: ⢠install identical DIMMs in all four sockets or ⢠install identical DIMM pair in DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 (blue sockets) and identical DIMM pair in DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 (black sockets)
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-13 2.5.2.2 DDR Qualified V endor List The following table lists the PC3200 (DDR400) memory modules that have been tested and qualified for use with this motherboard. Obtain DDR DIMMs only from ASUS qualified vendors for better system performance. Make sure to use only the tested and qualified DDR400 DIMMs listed above. Other DDR DIMMs manufactured by other vendors may not be suitable for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) for the latest qualified vendor DDR 400 DDR333 module list. A* - supports one module inserted in any slot in a Single-channel memory configuration. B* - supports one pair of modules inserted into either the blue slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory configuration . C* - support for 4 modules inserted into the blue and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory configuration. Size V endor Model Brand SS/DS Component A* B* C* 256MB A DA T A MDGA5F3G315B1EC2 ADA T A SS ADD8608A8A-5B ⢠⢠⢠256MB A DA T A MDOWB5F3G316B1EAE Winbond SS W942508BH-5 ⢠⢠256MB A DA T A MDOSS6F3G31JB1EAE SAMSUNG SS K4H560838D-TCC4 ⢠⢠256MB Apacer 77.10636.465 SAMSUNG SS K4H560838D-TCC4 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Apacer 77.10736.464 SAMSUNG DS K4H560838D-TCC4 ⢠⢠⢠256MB Corsair CMX256-3500C2 XMS3502v1.1 N/A SS N/A ⢠⢠512MB Corsair CMX512-3500C2 XMS3502v1.1 N/A DS N/A ⢠⢠256MB Hynix HYMD232646B8J-D43AA Hynix SS HY5DU56822BT -D43 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Hynix HYMD232646B8J-D43AA Hynix DS HY5DU56822BT -D43 ⢠⢠⢠128MB Infineon HYS64D16301GU-5-B Infineon SS HYB25D256160BT -5B ⢠⢠⢠256MB Infineon HYS64D32300GU-5-B Infineon SS HYB25D256800BT -5B ⢠⢠⢠512MB Infineon HYS64D64320GU-5-B Infineon SS HYB25D256800BT -5B ⢠⢠⢠256MB Kingston KVR400X64C25/256 Winbond SS W942508BH-5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Kingston KVR400X64C25/512 Winbond DS W942508BH-5 ⢠256MB Kingston KHX3500/256 N/A SS N/A ⢠⢠256MB MICRON MT16VDDT3264AG-403B2 MICRON DS MT46V16M8-5TESB ⢠⢠512MB PSC AL6D8A53TK1-5B PSC DS A2S56D30A TP ⢠⢠⢠256MB SAMSUNG M368L3223ETM-CCC SAMSUNG SS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠512MB SAMSUNG M368L6423ETM-CCC SAMSUNG DS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠256MB T ranscend TS32MLD64V4F3 SAMSUNG SS K4H560838D-TCC4 ⢠⢠256MB T ranscend TS32MLD64V4F3 Mosel SS V58C2256804SA T5 ⢠⢠512MB T ranscend TS64MLD64V4F3 SAMSUNG DS K4H560838D-TCC4 ⢠⢠256MB T ranscend TS64MLD64V4F3 Mosel DS V58C2256804SA T5 ⢠⢠⢠256MB T winMOS M2G9108AF A TT9FD81AA4T T winMOS SS TMD7608F8E50D ⢠⢠⢠512MB T winMOS M2G9J16AGA TT9F081AA4T T winMOS DS TMD7608F8E50D ⢠⢠256MB T winMOS M2S9108AF APS9F0811A-T PSC SS A2S56D30A TP ⢠⢠⢠256MB Winbond W9425GCDB-5 Winbond SS W942508CH-5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Winbond W9451GCDB-5 Winbond DS W942508CH-5 ⢠⢠â¢
2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5.3 Installing a DIMM Follow these steps to install a DIMM. 1. Locate the DIMM sockets in the motherboard. 2.5.4 Removing a DIMM Follow these steps to remove a DIMM. 4. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. 2. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 3. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. P4P800 ® P4P800 184-Pin DDR DIMM Sockets 80 Pins 104 Pins DIMM_A 1 DIMM_A 2 DIMM_B 1 DIMM_B 2 Make sure to unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. A DDR DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it fits in only one direction. DO NOT force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. Support the DIMM lightly with your fingers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it flips out with extra force. Unlocked Retaining Clip DDR DIMM NOTCH Locked Retaining Clip
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-15 2.6 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The motherboard has five PCI slots and one Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP) slot. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.6.1 Installing an expansion card Follow these steps to install an expansion card. 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press firmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier . 6. Replace the system cover . 2.6.2 Configuring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, configure the card by adjusting the software settings. 1. T urn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any . See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components.
2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information Standard Interrupt Assignments IRQ Priority Standard Function 0 1 System T imer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 N/A Programmable Interrupt 3* 1 1 Communications Port (COM2) 4* 12 Communications Port (COM1) 5* 13 Sound Card (sometimes LPT2) 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7* 15 Printer Port (LPT1) 8 3 System CMOS/Real T ime Clock 9* 4 ACPI Mode when used 10* 5 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering 1 1* 6 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering 12* 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14* 9 Primary IDE Channel 15* 10 Secondary IDE Channel * These IRQs are usually available for ISA or PCI devices. IRQ assignments for this motherboard ABCDE FG H PCI slot 1 â â â â â shared â â PCI slot 2 â â â â â â shared â PCI slot 3 â â â â â â â shared PCI slot 4 â â â â shared â â â PCI slot 5 â â â â â shared â â AGP slot used â â â â â â â Onboard USB 1.1/2.0 controller â â â â shared shared shared shared Onboard LAN â â â â â â shared â Onboard RAID â â â â â â â shared Onboard 1394 â â â â shared â â â Onboard Audio â â used â â â â â When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conflicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-17 2.6.3 PCI slots There are five 32-bit PCI slots on this motherboard. The slots support PCI cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI specifications. The following figure shows a LAN card installed on a PCI slot. ⢠The PCI 5 slot and the WiFi slot can not be used at the same time. ⢠When installing long PCI cards, it is recommended that to install in PCI slots 2, 4 or 5. Long PCI cards installed in PCI slot 1 may interfere with the SA T A connectors. ⢠When installing 64-bit PCI cards, it is recommended not to install in PCI slot 3. 64-bit PCI cards installed in PCI slot 3 may interfere with the USB connectors.
2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.6.4 AGP slot This motherboard has an Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP) slot that only supports 1.5V AGP cards. When you buy an AGP card, make sure that you ask for one with 1.5V specification. Note the notches on the card golden fingers to ensure that they fit the AGP slot on your motherboard. P4P800 ® P4P800 Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP) Keyed for 1.5v If installing the A T i 9500 or 9700 Pro Series VGA cards, use only the card version PN xxx-xxxxx-30 or later , for optimum performance and overclocking stability . Install only 1.5V AGP cards on this motherboard! 3.3V AGP cards are not supported in this motherboard.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-19 2.6.5 W i-Fi slot The Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) slot will support the ASUS Wi-Fi module when available. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) for product updates. The Wi-Fi slot conforms to the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.1 1b standard for wireless devices operating in the 2.4 GHz frequency band. This standard includes provisions for three radio technologies: direct sequence spread spectrum, frequency hopping spread spectrum, and infrared. Devices that comply with the 802.1 1b standard operate at data rates of up to 1 1 Mbps for direct sequence spread spectrum. The IEEE 802.1 1b specification allocates the 2.4 GHz frequency band into 14 overlapping operating channels. Each Channel corresponds to a different set of frequencies. If operating multiple 802.1 1b wireless PCI cards in the same vicinity , the distance between the center frequencies must be at least 25 MHz to avoid interference. The channels available to an 802.1 1b wireless PCI card will vary from country to country . In the United States, the 802.1 1b standard allocates 1 1 operating channels for direct sequence devices. Channels 1, 6, and 1 1 are independent and do not overlap with each other . P4P800 ® P4P800 WIRELESS Connectors WIF I The PCI 5 slot and the Wi-Fi slot may not be used at the same time.
2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.7 Jumpers 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) This jumper allows you to clear the Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. Y ou can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The RAM data in CMOS, that include system setup information such as system passwords, is powered by the onboard button cell battery . T o erase the R TC RAM: 1. T urn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery . 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Replace the battery . 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer . 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. P4P800 ® P4P800 Clear RTC RAM CLRTC1 Normal Clear CMOS (Default) 12 23 Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC1 jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! Y ou do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-21 2. SMB 2.0 (6-1 pin SMB20) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the SM bus support for PCI slots. Set this jumper to pins 1-2 to enable the SM bus support. The jumpers are disable as default setting. 3. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the keyboard wake-up feature. Set this jumper to pins 2-3 ( 5VSB) if you wish to wake up the computer when you press a key on the keyboard (the default value is [Disabled]). This feature requires an A TX power supply that can supply at least 1A on the 5VSB lead and a corresponding setting in the BIOS. (see section 4.5.1 Power Up Control) P4P800 ® P4P800 SMB2.0 Support SMB20 Disable Enable (Defaul t) 3 2 2 1 P4P800 ® P4P800 Keyboard Power Setting (Default) 5V 5VSB KBPWR 23 12
2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information 4. USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USBPW56, USBPW78) Set these jumpers to 5V to wake up the computer from S1 sleep mode (CPU stopped, DRAM refreshed, system running in low power mode) using the connected USB devices. Set to 5VSB to wake up from S3 and S4 sleep modes (no power to CPU, DRAM in slow refresh, power supply in reduced power mode). The USBPW12 and USBPW34 jumpers are for the rear USB ports. The USBPW56 and USBPW78 jumpers are for the internal USB header that you can connect to the front USB ports. P4P800 ® P4P800 USB Device W ake Up 3 2 2 1 5V (Default) 5VSB USBPW12 USBPW34 3 2 2 1 5V (Default) 5VSB USBPW56 USBPW78 1. The USB device wake-up feature requires a power supply that can provide 500mA on the 5VSB lead for each USB port. Otherwise, the system would not power up. 2. The total current consumed must NOT exceed the power supply capability ( 5VSB) whether under normal condition or in sleep mode.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-23 2.8 Connectors This section describes and illustrates the internal connectors on the motherboard. 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) This connector supports the provided floppy drive ribbon cable. After connecting one end to the motherboard, connect the other end to the floppy drive. (Pin 5 is removed to prevent incorrect insertion when using ribbon cables with pin 5 plug). P4P800 ® NOTE: Orient the red markings o n the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. P4P800 Floppy Disk Drive Connector PIN 1 FLOPPY1 Always connect ribbon cables with the colored to Pin 1 on the connectors. Pin 1 is usually on the side closest to the power connector on hard drives and CD-ROM drives, but may be on the opposite side on floppy disk drives.
2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1, SEC_IDE1) This connector supports the provided UltraDMA100/66 IDE hard disk ribbon cable. Connect the cableâ s blue connector to the primary (recommended) or secondary IDE connector , then connect the gray connector to the UltraDMA100/66 slave device (hard disk drive) and the black connector to the UltraDMA100/66 master device. It is recommended that you connect non-UltraDMA100/66 devices to the secondary IDE connector . If you install two hard disks, you must configure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly . Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. BIOS supports specific device bootup. If you have more than two UltraDMA100/66 devices, purchase another UltraDMA100/66 cable. Y ou may configure two hard disks to be both master devices with two ribbon cables â one for the primary IDE connector and another for the secondary IDE connector . P4P800 ® P4P800 IDE Connectors NOTE: Orient the red marking s (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. SEC_IDE1 PRI_IDE1 PIN 1 1. Pin 20 on each IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the UltraDMA cable connector . This prevents incorrect orientation when you connect the cables. 2. The hole near the blue connector on the UltraDMA100/66 cable is intentional. For UltraDMA100/66 IDE devices, use an 80-conductor IDE cable. The UltraDMA/66 cable included in the motherboard package also supports UltraDMA100. Important notes when using legacy OS ⢠Refer to page 2-26 on how to configure P-A T A and S-A T A devices if you installed a legacy operating system (e.g. MS-DOS, Windows 98/ME/NT4.0). ⢠In legacy OS, manually set DMA mode in Device Manager under System Properties, if your hard disk supports UDMA mode.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-25 3. Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1, SA T A2) These next generation connectors support the thin Serial A T A cables for primary internal storage devices. The current Serial A T A interface allows up to 150 MB/s data transfer rate, faster than the standard parallel A T A with 133 MB/s (Ultra A T A/133). P4P800 ® P4P800 SA T A Connectors S ATA 2 GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXP2 RSA T A_RXN2 GND S ATA 1 GND RSA T A_TXP1 RSA T A_TXN1 GND RSA T A_RXP1 RSA T A_RXN1 GND Important notes on Serial A T A solution: ⢠In legacy operating system (W in 98, WinME, WinNT , DOS) environment, using SA T A will disable one of the IDE channels from ICH5R south bridge chipset. See BIOS section for correct setting. ⢠The Serial A T A cable is smaller and more flexible allowing easier routing inside the chassis. The lower pin count of the Serial A T A cable eliminates the problem caused by the wide, flat ribbon cables of the Parallel A T A interface. ⢠The Serial A T A RAID driver is available for Windows ® XP⢠only . ⢠Only RAID 0 is supported. ⢠Hot plug support for Serial A T A drive and connections are not available in this motherboard. ⢠Install Windows ® XP⢠Service Pack 1 when using Serial A T A.
2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information Parallel A T A and Serial A T A device configurations Following are the Parallel A T A and Serial A T A device configurations supported by Intel ICH5 specifications. Native operating systems (OS) are Windows 2000/XP . ICH5R supports a maximum of six (6) devices using these OS. Legacy OS are MS-DOS, Windows 98/Me/NT4.0. ICH5R supports a maximum of four (4) devices using these OS. Required IDE Configuration settings in BIOS Refer to the following table for the appropriate BIOS settings of the above P-A T A and S-A T A device configurations. See section â4.3.6 IDE Configurationâ for details on the related BIOS items. Windows Windows 98/Me/NT4.0 BIOS item 2000/XP A B C Onboard IDE Operate Mode Enhanced Mode Compatible Mode Compatible Mode Compatible Mode Enhanced Mode Support On S- A T A â â â IDE Port Settings â Primary P-A T A S-A T A Sec. P-A T A S-A T A P-A T A Ports Only Legend: Supported â Disabled P-A T A S-A T A Operating System Primary Secondary Port 0 Port 1 (2 devices) (2 devices) (1 device) (1 device) 1. Windows 2000/XP 2. Windows 98/Me/NT4.0 Configuration A â Configuration B â Configuration C ââ
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-27 4. RAID A T A/133/100/66/33 connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID1, SEC_RAID1) These connectors support either RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 or JBOD configuration through the onboard VIA ® 6410 controller . Y ou can use the RAID feature to set up a disk array configuration and to support additional IDE devices. P4P800 ® P4P800 RAID Connectors NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_RAID1 PIN 1 PIN 1 SEC_RAID1 5. SMBus connector (6-1 pin SMB1) This connector allows you to connect SMBus (System Management Bus) devices. Devices communicate with an SMBus host and/or other SMBus devices using the SMBus interface. P4P800 ® P4P800 SMBus Connector SMB1 1 SMBCLK Ground SMBDA T A 3V FLOA TING Important notes on the RAID feature: ⢠By default, the drive that you connect to the PRI_RAID connector follow the A T A133/100/66/33 protocol as an independent drive, not as a disk array . ⢠The RAID/SA T A controller chipset does not support A T API devices such as CD-ROMs, DVD-ROMs, etc. ⢠RAID feature only supported in Microsoft Operating Systems.
2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information 6. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) This lead is for a chassis designed with intrusion detection feature. This requires an external detection mechanism such as a chassis intrusion sensor or microswitch. When you remove any chassis component, the sensor triggers and sends a high-level signal to this lead to record a chassis intrusion event. By default, the pins labeled âChassis Signalâ and âGroundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. If you wish to use the chassis intrusion detection feature, remove the jumper cap from the pins. 7. CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan Connectors (3-pin CPU_F AN1, PWR_F AN1, CHA_F AN1) The fan connectors support cooling fans of 350mA~740mA (8.88W max.) or a total of 1A~2.22A (26.64W max.) at 12V . Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector . P4P800 ® P4P800 Chassis Alarm Lead CHASSIS 1 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND (Default ) P4P800 ® P4P800 12-V olt Fan Connectors CPU_F AN1 CHA_F AN1 GND Rotatio n 12V PWR_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Lack of sufficient air flow within the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! DO NOT place jumper caps on the fan connectors!
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-29 8. A TX power connectors (20-pin A TXPWR, 4-pin A TX12V) These connectors connect to an A TX 12V power supply . The plugs from the power supply are designed to fit these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down firmly until the connectors completely fit. In addition to the 20-pin A TXPWR1 connector , this motherboard requires that you connect the 4-pin A TX 12V power plug to provide suf ficient power to the CPU. P4P800 ® P4P800 A TX Power Connector A TXPWR1 A TX12V1 3.3VDC -12.0VDC COM PS_ON# COM COM COM -5.0VDC 5.0VDC 5.0VDC PWR_OK 12.0VDC 3.3VDC 3.3VDC COM 5.0VDC COM 5.0VDC COM 5VSB 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 1. Do not forget to connect the 4-pin A TX 12V power plug. Otherwise, the system does not boot up. 2. Make sure that your A TX 12V power supply can provide 8A on the 12V lead and at least 1A on the 5-volt standby lead ( 5VSB). The minimum recommended wattage is 230W , or 300W for a fully configured system. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate.
2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information 9. USB headers (10-1 pin USB_56, USB_78) If the USB ports on the rear panel are inadequate, a USB header is available for additional USB ports. The USB header complies with USB 2.0 specification that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. This speed advantage over the conventional 12 Mbps on USB 1.1 allows faster Internet connection, interactive gaming, and simultaneous running of high-speed peripherals. P4P800 ® P4P800 USB 2.0 Header USB_56 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND NC USB 5V USB_P5- USB_P5 GND 1 USB_78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 1 Y ou must install the driver before you can use the USB 2.0 capability . NEVER connect a 1394 cable to the USB_56 or USB_78 connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! The USB port is an optional item and not included in this motherboard package. 10. Power supply thermal connector (2-pin TRPWR1) If your power supply has a thermal monitoring feature, connect its thermal sensor cable to this connector . P4P800 ® P4P800 Power Supply Thermal Connector TRPWR 1 Ground TRPWR
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-31 12. Internal audio connectors (4-pin CD1, AUX1, MODEM) These connectors allow you to receive stereo audio input from sound sources such as a CD-ROM, TV tuner , or MPEG card. The MODEM connector allows the onboard audio to interface with a voice modem card with a similar connector . It also allows the sharing of mono_in (such as a phone) and a mono_out (such as a speaker) between the audio and a voice modem card. 1 1. GAME/MIDI connector (16-1 pin GAME1) This connector supports an optional GAME/MIDI module. If a GAME/ MIDI module is available, connect the GAME/MIDI cable to this connector . The GAME/MIDI port on the module connects a joystick or a game pad for playing games, and MIDI devices for playing or editing audio files. P4P800 ® P4P800 Game Connector GAME1 5V 5V J2B1 J2CX MIDI_OUT J2CY J2B2 MIDI_IN J1B1 J1CX GND GND J1CY J1B2 5V P4P800 ® P4P800 Internal Audio Connectors CD1(Black) AUX1(White) Right Audio Channe l Left Audio Channel Ground Ground MODEM Modem-In Ground Modem-Out Ground The GAME port module is an optional item not included in this motherboard package.
2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information 14. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin FP_AUDIO) This is an interface for the Intel front panel audio cable that allow convenient connection and control of audio devices. By default, the pins labeled LINE_OUT_R/BLINE_OUT_R and the pins LINE_OUT_L/BLINE_OUT_L are shorted with jumper caps. Remove the caps only when you are connecting the front panel audio cable. 13. IEEE 1394 connectors (10-1 pin IEEE1394_2(Orange)) These connectors are for IEEE 1394 modules. Attach the 10-1 pin cable plugs to these connectors. Y ou may also connect a 1394- compliant internal hard disk to these connectors. P4P800 ® P4P800 IEEE-1394 Connector IE1394_2 1 TP A0- GND TPB0- 12V GND TP A0 GND TPB0 12V P4P800 ® P4P800 Front Panel Audio Connector FP_AUDIO BLINE_OUT_L MIC2 Line out_R Line out_L BLINE_OUT_R NC MICPWR 5V A AGND NEVER connect a USB cable to any of the IEEE 1394 (orange) connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! The IEEE 1394 connector module is not included in this motherboard package.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-33 15. Digital Audio connector (6-1 pin SPDIF_OUT) This connector is for the S/PDIF audio module to allow digital sound output. Connect one end of the S/PDIF audio cable to this connector and the other end to the S/PDIF module. 16. Serial Port 2 connector (10-1 pin COM2) This connector accomodates a second serial port using an optional serial port bracket. Connect the bracket cable to this connector then install the bracket into a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. P4P800 ® P4P800 Digital Audio Connector 5V SPDIFOUT GND SPDIF_OUT P4P800 ® P4P800 Serial COM2 Bracket PIN 1 COM2 The S/PDIF module is not included in this motherboard package. The COM2 module is not included in this motherboard package.
2-34 Chapter 2: Hardware information 17. System panel connector (20-pin P ANEL) This connector accommodates several system front panel functions. ⢠System Power LED Lead (3-1 pin PLED) This 3-1 pin connector connects to the system power LED. The LED lights up when you turn on the system power , and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠System W arning Speaker Lead (4-pin SPKR) This 4-pin connector connects to the case-mounted speaker and allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠System Management Interrupt Lead (2-pin SMI) This 2-pin connector allows you to manually place the system into a suspend mode, or âgreenâ mode, where system activity is instantly decreased to save power and to expand the life of certain system components. Attach the case-mounted suspend switch to this 2-pin connector . ⢠A TX Power Switch / Soft-Off Switch Lead (2-pin PWRBTN) This connector connects a switch that controls the system power . Pressing the power switch turns the system between ON and SLEEP , or ON and SOFT OFF , depending on the BIOS or OS settings. Pressing the power switch while in the ON mode for more than 4 seconds turns the system OFF . ⢠Reset Switch Lead (2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector connects to the case-mounted reset switch for rebooting the system without turning of f the system power . ⢠Hard disk activity LED (2-pin IDE_LED) This connector supplies power to the hard disk activity LED. Any read or write activity of an IDE device cause this LED to light up. P4P800 ® P4P800 System Panel Connectors * Requires an A TX power supply . PLED- Ground PWR 5V Speaker Speaker Connector Power LED Ground Reset SW SMI Lead ExtSMI# Ground Reset Ground Ground A TX Power Switch* PLED IDE_LED- IDE_LED IDE_LED
Chapter 3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence and gives information on the BIOS beep codes.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard Chapter summar y 3.1 Starting up for the first time .......................... 3-1 3.2 V ocal POST Messages ................................... 3-2 3.3 Powering off the computer ........................... 3-4
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 3-1 3. 1 St ar ting up for the fir st time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover . 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector . 5. T urn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power , the power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For A TX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the A TX power switch. If your monitor complies with âgreenâ standards or if it has a âpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on tests. While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power , the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. 7. At power on, hold down <Delete> to enter BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4.
3-2 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.2 V ocal POST Messages This motherboard includes the Winbond speech controller to support a special feature called the ASUS POST Reporterâ¢. This feature gives you vocal POST messages and alerts to inform you of system events and boot status. In case of a boot failure, you will hear the specific cause of the problem. These POST messages are customizable using the Winbond V oice Editor software that came with your package. Y ou can record your own messages to replace the default messages. Following is a list of the default POST messages and their corresponding actions, if any . POST Message Action No CPU installed ⢠Install an Intel Pentium 4 Processor into the CPU socket. System failed CPU test ⢠Check the CPU if properly installed. ⢠Call ASUS technical support for assistance. See the âASUS contact informationâ on page x. System failed memory test ⢠Install 184-pin unbuffered PC3200/2700/2100 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠Check if the DIMMs on the DIMM sockets are properly installed. ⢠Make sure that your DIMMs are not defective. ⢠Refer to section â2.5 System memoryâ for instruction on installing a DIMM. System failed VGA test ⢠Install a PCI VGA card into one of the PCI slots, or a 1.5V AGP card into the AGP slot. ⢠Make sure that your VGA/AGP card is not defective. System failed due to CPU ⢠Check your CPU settings in BIOS over-clocking and make sure you only set to the recommended settings. See section â4.4 Advanced menu.â
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 3-3 POST Message Action No keyboard detected ⢠Check your keyboard if properly connected to the purple PS/2 connector on the rear panel. ⢠See section â1.4.1 Major componentsâ for the location of the connector . No floppy disk detected ⢠Make sure you have connected a floppy disk to the floppy disk connector on the motherboard. No IDE hard disk detected ⢠Make sure you have connected an IDE hard disk drive to the one of the IDE connectors on the motherboard. CPU temperature too high ⢠Check CPU fan if working properly . CPU fan failed ⢠Check the CPU fan and make sure it turns on after you applied power to the system. ⢠Make sure that your CPU fan supports the fan speed detection function. CPU voltage out of range ⢠Check your power supply and make sure it is not defective. ⢠Call ASUS technical support for assistance. See the âASUS contact informationâ on page x. System completed Power-On Self T est ⢠No action required Computer now booting from operating ⢠No action required system Y ou may disable the ASUS POST Reporter⢠in the BIOS setup. See section â4.4 Speech Configurationâ.
3-4 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.3 Powering of f the com puter Using the OS shut down function If you use Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP , click the Start button, click Shut Down , then the OK button to shut down the computer . The power supply should turn off after Windows shuts down. Using the dual function power switch While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than 4 seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than 4 seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. See section â4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4.
Chapter 4 BIOS setup This chapter gives information about the ASUS P4P800 Deluxe Basic Input/Output System (BIOS).This chapter includes updating the BIOS using the AFUDOS.EXE utility that is bundled with the support CD.
ASUS P4SDX Deluxe motherboard Chapter summar y 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS .............. 4-1 4.2 BIOS Setup program ...................................... 4-7 4.3 Main Menu .................................................... 4-10 4.4 Advanced Menu ........................................... 4-15 4.5 Power Menu .................................................. 4-27 4.6 Boot Menu .................................................... 4-32 4.7 Exit Menu ...................................................... 4-37
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-1 4. 1 Managing and updating your BIOS 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable floppy disk. DOS environment Insert a 1.44 MB floppy disk into the drive. At the DOS prompt, type: format A:/S , then press the <Enter> key Windows environment a. From your Windows desktop, click on Start , point to Settings , then click on Control Panel . b. Double-click on Add/Remove Programs icon from the Control Panel window . c. Click on the Startup Disk tab, then on Create Disk... button. d. Insert a 1.44 MB floppy disk when prompted. Follow the suceeding screen instructions to complete the process. 2. Copy the original (or the latest) motherboard BIOS to the bootable floppy disk. 4.1.2 Using AFUDOS to update the BIOS Update the BIOS using the AFUDOS.EXE utility in DOS environment. 1. V isit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for your motherboard. Save the BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk. 2. Copy the AFUDOS.EXE utility from the support CD to the bootable floppy disk that contains the BIOS file. 3. Boot the system from the floppy disk. W rite down the BIOS file name to a piece of paper . Y ou need to type the exact BIOS file name at the prompt. ⢠The original BIOS file for this motherboard is in the root directory of the support CD filenamed âP4P800.ROMâ. ⢠Copy the original BIOS to a bootable floppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future.
4-2 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup 4. At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos / i <filename> where âfilenameâ means the latest (or original) BIOS file that you copied to the bootable floppy disk. The screen displays the status of the update process. A:\>afudos /iP4P800.rom AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.10 Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading file ..... done Erasing flash .... done Writing flash .... 0x0008CC00 (9%) When the BIOS update process is complete, the utility returns to the DOS prompt. A:\>afudos /iP4P800.rom AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.10 Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading file ..... done Erasing flash .... done Writing flash .... 0x0008CC00 (9%) Verifying flash .. done A:\> 5. Reboot the system from the hard disk. The BIOS information on the screen is for reference only . What you see on your screen may not be exactly the same as shown. DO NOT shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so may cause system boot failure!
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-3 1. At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos /o <filename> where âfilenameâ can be any user provided filename of not more than eight (8) alpha-numeric characters for the main filename and three (3) alpha-numeric characters for the extension name. Press the Enter key . 2. The utility will copy the current system BIOS by default to the floppy disk. Make sure that the floppy disk is not write-protected and have enough space (at least 600KB) to store the file. The BIOS information on the screen is for reference only . What you see on your screen may not be exactly the same as shown. 4.1.3 Using AFUDOS to copy BIOS from PC The AFUDOS.EXE utility can also be used to copy the current system BIOS settings to a floppy or hard disk. The copy can be used as a backup in case the system BIOS fails or gets corrupted. A:\>afudos /oMYBIOS03.rom AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.10 Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading flash ..... done A:\> When the BIOS copy process is complete, the utility returns to the DOS prompt. Main filename Extension name A:\>afudos /oMYBIOS03.rom AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.10 Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading flash ..... 0x0008CC00 (9%)
4-4 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup 4.1.4 Using ASUS EZ Flash to update the BIOS The ASUS EZ Flash feature allows you to easily update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a diskette and using a DOS-based utility . The EZ Flash is built-in the BIOS firmware so it is accessible by simply pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self T ests (POST). T o update the BIOS using ASUS EZ Flash: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for your motherboard and rename the downloaded file as P4P800.ROM . Save the BIOS file to a floppy disk. 2. Reboot the system. 3. T o launch EZ Flash, press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. 4. Insert the floppy disk that contains the BIOS file. If all the necessary files are found in the floppy disk, EZ Flash performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. User recovery requested. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âP4P800.româ. Completed. Start flashing... Flashed successfully. Rebooting. User recovery requested. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... ⢠If there is no floppy disk found in the drive, the error message â Floppy not found! â appears. ⢠If the correct BIOS file is not found in the floppy disk, the error message â P4P800.ROM not found!â is displayed. Make sure to rename the downloaded BIOS file as â P4P800.ROM â. DO NOT shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so may cause system boot failure!
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-5 4.1.5 Recovering the BIOS with CrashFree BIOS 2 The CrashFree BIOS 2 auto recovery tool allows you to restore BIOS from the motherboard support CD, or from a floppy disk that contains the BIOS file, in case the current BIOS on the motherboard fails or gets corrupted. T o recover the BIOS from a floppy disk: 1. Boot the system. 2. When a corrupted BIOS is detected, the following screen message appears. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... 3. Insert a floppy disk that contains the original or the latest BIOS file for this motherboard. If all the necessary files are found in the floppy disk, the BIOS update process continues. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âP4P800.româ. Completed. Start flashing... 4. When the BIOS update process is complete, reboot the system. 1. Prepare the support CD that came with the motherboard or a floppy disk that contains the motherboard BIOS before proceeding with the BIOS update process. 2. If you have saved a copy of the original motherboard BIOS to a bootable floppy disk, you may also use this disk to restore the BIOS. See section â4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk.â DO NOT shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so may cause system boot failure! Make sure that the BIOS file in the floppy disk is renamed as â P4P800.ROM â.
4-6 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup T o recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Boot the system. 2. When a corrupted BIOS is detected, the following screen message appears. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... 3. Place the support CD in the CD-ROM. The support CD contains the original BIOS for this motherboard. 4. When the BIOS update process is complete, reboot the system. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy not found! Checking for CD-ROM... CD-ROM found. Reading file âP4P800.româ. Completed. Start flashing... The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file. DO NOT shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so may cause system boot failure! If there is no floppy disk found in the drive, the system automatically checks the CD-ROM.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-7 4.2 BIOS Setup pr ogram This motherboard supports a programmable firmware hub (FWH) that you can update using the provided utility described in section â4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconfiguring your system, or prompted to âRun Setupâ. This section explains how to configure your system using this utility . Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you may want to change the configuration of your computer in the future. For example, you may want to enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconfigure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the firmware hub. The firmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility . When you start up the computer , the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Delete> during the Power-On Self T est (POST) to enter the Setup utility . Otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST , restart the system by pressing <Ctrl> <Alt> <Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. Y ou can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the first two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. It is a menu-driven program, which means you can scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. The BIOS setup screens shown in this chapter are for reference purposes only , and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. V isit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest product and BIOS information. The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Default Settings item under the Exit Menu. See section â4.7 Exit Menu.â
4-8 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup 4.2.2 Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system configuration Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) configuration Boot For changing the system boot configuration Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen T o select an item on the menu bar , press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4.2.3 Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Navigation keys General help Menu bar Sub-menu items Configuration fields Menu items Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another .
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-9 4.2.4 Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the specific items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power , Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 Sub-menu items An item with a sub-menu on any menu screen is distinguished by a solid triangle before the item. T o display the sub-menu, select the item and press Enter . 4.2.6 Configuration fields These fields show the values for the menu items. If an item is user- configurable, you may change the value of the field opposite the item. Y ou can not select an item that is not user-configurable. A configurable field is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. T o change the value of a field, select it then press Enter to display a list of options. Refer to â4.2.7 Pop-up window .â 4.2.7 Pop-up window Select a menu item then press Enter to display a pop-up window with the configuration options for that item. 4.2.8 Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not fit on the screen. Press Up/ Down arrow keys or PageUp/ PageDown keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Main menu items Scroll bar Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced Chipset settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in the sections below may cause system to malfunction. Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Memory Acceleration Mode [Auto] DRAM Idle Timer [Auto] DRAm Refresh Rate [Auto] Graphic Adapter Priority [AGP/PCI] Graphics Aperture Size [ 64 MB] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] ICH Delayed Transaction [Enabled] MPS Revision [1.4] Pop-up window
4-10 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 System T ime [xx:xx:xxxx] This item allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] This item allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of floppy drive installed. Configuration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5in.] 4.3.4 Language [English] This field allows you to choose the BIOS language version from the available options. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Refer to section â4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-11 4.3.5 Primary and Secondary IDE Master/Slave; Third and Fourth IDE Master While entering Setup, BIOS auto-detects the presence of IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item then press Enter to display the IDE device information. The values opposite the dimmed items (Device, V endor , Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMAR T monitoring) are auto-detected by BIOS and are not user-configurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. T ype [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to Auto allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select CDROM if you are specifically configuring a CD-ROM drive. Select ARMD (A T API Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP , LS-120, or MO drive. Configuration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to Auto enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector T ransfer) [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to Auto, the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to Disabled, the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST320413A Size : 20.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : Supported Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Select the type of device connected to the system. Primary IDE Master Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Type LBA/Large Mode Block (Multi-sector Transfer) PIO Mode DMA Mode Smart Monitoring 32Bit Data Transfer [Auto] [Auto] [Auto] [Auto] [Auto] [Auto] [Disabled]
4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] DMA Mode [Auto] Selects the DMA mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] [UDMA3] [UDMA4] [UDMA5] SMAR T Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting T echnology . Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data T ransfer [Disabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer . Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] IDE Configuration Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] Configure S-ATA as RAID [No] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] 4.3.6 IDE Configuration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the configurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press Enter if you wish to configure the item. Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the operating system (OS) that you installed. Set to Enhanced Mode if you are using native OS, such as Windows 2000/XP . Set to Compatible Mode if you are using legacy OS including MS-DOS, Windows ME/98/NT4.0. Configuration options: [Compatible Mode] [Enhanced Mode]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-13 Enhanced Mode Support On [S-A T A] The default setting S-A T A allows you to use native OS on Serial A T A and Parallel A T A ports. W e recommend that you do not change the default setting for better OS compatibility . In this setting, you may use legacy OS on the Parallel A T A ports only if you did not install any Serial A T A device. The P-A T A S-A T A and P-A T A options are for advanced users only . If you set to any of these options and encounter problems, revert to the default setting S-A T A . Configuration options: [P-A T A S-A T A] [S-A T A] [P-A T A] IDE Port Settings [Primary P-A T A S-A T A] Allows selection of the IDE ports to activate if you are using a legacy operating system. Set to [Primary P-A T A S-A T A] if you wish to use the primary Parallel A T A and Serial A T A ports, or set to [Secondary P-A T A SA T A] to enable the secondary P-A T A port instead. Setting to [P-A T A Ports Only] disables the two Serial A T A ports supported by ICH5. Configuration options: [Primary P-A T A S-A T A] [Secondary P-A T A S-A T A] [P-A T A Ports Only] IDE Detect T ime Out [35] Selects the time out value for detecting A T A/A T API devices. Configuration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] Refer to the section âParallel A T A and Serial A T A device configurationsâ on page 2-26 for the appropriate settings of the IDE Configuration items under different operating systems. The Enhanced Mode Support On appears only when the item Onboard IDE Operate Mode is set to Enhanced Mode . The IDE Port Settings appears only when the item Onboard IDE Operate Mode is set to Compatible Mode . Configure S-A T A as RAID [No] This field configures the S-A T A to function as an IDE controller or RAID. Configuration options: [Y es] [No] Serial A T A BOOTROM [Enabled] This field enables or disables the Serial A T A boot ROM. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Serial A T A BOOTROM item appears only when the item Configure S-A T A as RAID is set to [Y es] .
4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit AMI BIOS Version : 08.00.08 Build Date : 04/03/03 ID : P4P81035 Processor Type : Intel(R) Pentium(R) 4 CPU 1.73GHz Speed : 1733 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Size : 256MB 4.3.7 System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system specifications. The items in this menu are auto-detected by BIOS. AMI BIOS This item displays the auto-detected BIOS information. Processor This item displays the auto-detected CPU specification. System Memory This item displays the auto-detected system memory .
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-15 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. JumperFree Configuration CPU Configuration Chipset Onboard Devices Configuration PCI PnP USB Configuration Speech Configuration Instant Music Configuration Configure CPU. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit AI Overclock Tuner [Standard] CPU Ratio [12] Performance Mode [Auto] Configure System Frequency/Voltage AI Overclock T uner [Standard] Allows selection of CPU overclocking options to achieve desired CPU internal frequency . Select either one of the preset overclocking options. Configuration options: [Manual] [Standard] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%] T ake caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect field values may cause the system to malfunction. Selecting a very high CPU frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting.
4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit AI Overclock Tuner [Manual] CPU External Frequency (MHz) [100] CPU Ratio [12] DRAM Frequency [Auto] AGP/PCI Frequency (MHz) [Auto] CPU VCore Offset to .IV [Disabled] DDR Reference Voltage [Auto] AGP VDDQ Voltage [1.50V] Performance Mode [Auto] Configure System Frequency/Voltage When you set the AI Overclocking T uner item to [Manual], the related overclocking items appear . If you are using an unlocked CPU, the item CPU Ratio appears under the AI Overclock T uner item. Y ou may select your desired ratio from the available options. CPU Ratio [12] This field sets the ratio between the CPU Core Clock and the Front Side Bus (FSB) Frequency . If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS, the actual and setpoint values may differ . Performance Mode [Auto] Allows enhanced system performance. Setting to [T urbo] may cause the system to become unstable. If this happens, revert to the default setting [Auto]. Configuration options: [Auto] [Standard] [T urbo] CPU External Frequency (MHz) [XXX] (value is auto-detected) Indicates the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. The bus frequency (external frequency) multiplied by the bus multiple equals the CPU speed. The value of this item is auto-detected by BIOS and is not manually configurable. The values range from 100 to 400. Refer to the following table for the correct Front Side Bus and CPU External Frequency settings. Front Side Bus CPU External Frequency FSB 800 200 MHz FSB 533 133 MHz FSB 400 100 MHz T able 4.4.1 FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-17 DDR Reference V oltage [Auto] Allows selection of the DDR SDRAM operating voltage. Configuration options: [2.85V] [2.75V] [2.65V] [2.55V] [Auto] AGP VDDQ voltage [1.50V] Allows selection of the AGP operating voltage. Configuration options: [1.80V] [1.70V] [1.60V] [1.50V] Refer to the CPU documentation before setting the CPU VCore voltage. A very high Vcore voltage may severely damage the CPU! Selecting a very high AGP/PCI frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. CPU VCore V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select a specific CPU VCore voltage. Configuration options: [Auto] [1.6000V] ... [1.4750V] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR operating frequency . Configuration options: [266 MHz] [333 MHz] [400 MHz] [Auto] AGP/PCI Frequency (MHz) [Auto] Allows you to adjust to a higher AGP/PCI frequency for better system performance and overclocking capability . Configuration options: [Auto] [66.66/33.33] [72.73/36.36] [80.00/40.00]
4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup 4.4.2 CPU Configuration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information auto-detected by BIOS. Hyper-Threading T echnology [Enabled] This item allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper-Threading T echnology . Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Manufacturer : Intel(R) Brand String : Intel(R) Pentium(R) 4 CPU 1.73GHz Frequency : 1733 MHz Ratio Status : Locked Ratio Actual Value : 13 Hyper Threading Technology [Enabled] Configure advanced CPU settings The item Hyper-Threading T echnology appears only if you installed an Intel Pentium 4 CPU that supports this feature. See page 2-4 for details. 4.4.3 Chipset The Chipset menu items allow you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press Enter to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced Chipset settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in the sections below may cause system to malfunction. Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Memory Acceleration Mode [Auto] DRAM Idle Timer [Auto] DRAm Refresh Rate [Auto] Graphic Adapter Priority [AGP/PCI] Graphics Aperture Size [ 64 MB] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] ICH Delayed Transaction [Enabled] MPS Revision [1.4]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-19 The following sub-items appear only when the item Configure DRAM Timing by SPD is set to Disabled. Configure DRAM T iming by SPD [Enabled] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Memory Acceleration Mode [Auto] This field when [Enabled] minimize latencies from CPU to memory to boost system performance. Configuration options: [Auto] [Enabled] If the system becomes unstable after changing the settings of any of the above items, revert to the default settings. DRAM Idle T imer [Auto] Configuration options: [Infinite] [0T] [8T] [16T] [64T] [Auto] DRAM Refresh Mode [Auto] Configuration options: [Auto] [15.6 uSec] [7.8 uSec] [64 uSec] [64T] Setting to [Enabled] may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting [Auto] . DRAM CAS# Latency [2.5 Clocks] This item controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Configuration options: [2.0 Clocks] [2.5 Clocks] [3.0 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Precharge [4 Clocks] This item controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DDR SDRAM. Configuration options: [4 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [2 Clocks] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [4 Clocks] This item controls the latency between the DDR SDRAM active command and the read/write command. Configuration options: [4 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [2 Clocks] DRAM Precharge Delay [8 Clocks] Configuration options: [8 Clocks] [7 Clocks] [6 Clocks] [5 Clocks] DRAM Burst Length [4 Clocks] Configuration options: [4 Clocks] [8 Clocks]
4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Graphic Adapter Priority [AGP/PCI] Allows selection of the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. Configuration options: [AGP/PCI] [PCI/AGP] Graphics Aperture Size [64MB] Allows you to select the size of mapped memory for AGP graphic data. Configuration options: [4MB] [8MB] [16MB] [32MB] [64MB] [128MB] [256MB] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] This field enables or disables the clock generator spread spectrum. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ICH Delayed T ransaction [Enabled] Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] MPS Revision [1.1] Configuration options: [1.1] [1.4] 4.4.4 Onboard Devices Configuration Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit OnBoard ACâ97 Audio [Auto] OnBoard VT6410 RAID Controller [Enabled] OnBoard IEEE 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard LAN [Enabled] OnBoard LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] Onboard Floppy Controller [Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] OnBoard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] OnBoard ACâ97 Audio [Auto] [Auto] allows the BIOS to detect whether you are using any audio device. If an audio device is detected, the onboard audio controller is enabled; if no audio device is detected, the controller is disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-21 OnBoard VT6410 RAID Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard VIA ® VT6410 RAID controller . Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnBoard IEEE 1394 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard IEEE 1394 controller . Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnBoard LAN [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard LAN controller . Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnBoard Floppy Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the floppy disk controller . Configuration options: [Disabled] [ Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Allows you to select the Serial Port2 base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Parallel Port Address [378] Allows you to select the Parallel Port base addresses. Configuration options: [Disabled] [378] [278] [3BC] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Allows you to select the Parallel Port mode. Configuration options: [Normal] [Bi-directional] [EPP] [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Configuration options: [DMA0] [DMA1] [DMA3] 3Com ® 3C940 does NOT support S5 W ake-On-LAN function under DOS mode or Window ® MEâ¢. OnBoard LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard LAN controller . This item appears only when the Onboard LAN item is set to Enabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup 4.4.5 PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Plug and Play OS [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] Advanced PCI/PnP settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in the sections below may cause system to malfunction. NO: Lets the bIOS configure all the devices in the system. YES: Lets the operating system configure Plug and Play (PnP) devices not required for boot if your system has a Plug and Play operating system. IRQ3 [Available] IRQ4 [Available] IRQ5 [Available] IRQ7 [Available] IRQ9 [Available] IRQ10 [Available] IRQ11 [Available] IRQ14 [Available] IRQ15 [Available] T ake caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect field values may cause the system to malfunction. Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Configuration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ7] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Allows you to select the Game Port address or to disable the port. Configuration options: [Disabled] [200/300] [200/330] [208/300] [208/330] Plug and Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS configures all the devices in the system. When set to [Y es] and if you installed a Plug & Play operating system, the operating system configures the Plug & Play devices not required for boot. Configuration options: [No] [Y es] PCI Latency T imer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register . Configuration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-23 The Module V ersion and USB Devices Enabled items show the auto- detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None. Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Y es] When set to [Y es], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Configuration options: [No] [Y es] Pallete Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the pallete snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly . Setting to [Disabled] deactivates this feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] Allows BIOS to use PCI bus mastering when reading/writing to IDE devices. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] IRQ xx [A vailable] When set to [Available], the specific IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Configuration options: [A vailable] [Reserved] 4.4.6 USB Configuration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press Enter to display the configuration options. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Module Version : 2.22.4-5.3 USB Devices Enabled : None USB Function [8 USB Ports] Legacy USB Support [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB Mass Storage Device Configuration USB Configuration Enables USB host controllers.
4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit USB Mass Storage Reset Delay [20 Sec] No USB Mass Storage device detected Device #1 N/A Emulation Type [N/A] Device #2 N/A Emulation Type [N/A] Device #3 N/A Emulation Type [N/A] Device #4 N/A Emulation Type [N/A] Device #5 N/A Emulation Type [N/A] Device #6 N/A Emulation Type [N/A] USB Mass Storage Device Configuration Number of seconds POST waits for the USB mass storage device after that start unit command. USB Mass Storage Device Configuration Legacy USB Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for legacy USB devices. Setting to Auto allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller . Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to configure the USB 2.0 controller in HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or Full Speed (12 Mbps). Configuration options: [HiSpeed ] [Full Speed] USB Function [8 USB Ports] Allows you to set the number of USB ports to activate. Configuration options: [Disabled] [2 USB Ports] [4 USB Ports] [6 USB Ports] [8 USB Ports] USB Mass Storage Reset Delay [20 Sec] Allows you to select the number of seconds POST waits for the USB mass storage device after the start unit command. The message âNo USB mass storage device detectedâ appears if none is installed in the system. Configuration options: [10 Sec ] [20 Sec] [30 Sec] [40 Sec]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-25 Emulation T ype [N/A] When set to Auto, USB devices less than 530MB will be emulated as floppy drive, and the remaining drives as hard drives. Forced FDD option can be used to force an HDD formatted drive to boot as FDD (for example, ZIP drive). The Device and Emulation T ype items appear only when there are installed USB devices. 4.4.7 Speech Configuration Speech POST Reporter [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Speech POST Reporter⢠feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following items appear only when Speech POST Reporter is set to Enabled. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Speech Post Reporter [Enabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Speech Option Disable/Enable Speech. -
4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Instant Music [Disabled] Instant Music Option Disable/Enable Instant Music feature. 4.4.8 Instant Music Configuration Instant Music [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Instant Music feature in BIOS. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Instant Music CD-ROM Drive [IDE Secondary Master] Allows you to select the CD-ROM drive that you wish to use for the Instant Music CD playback. Configuration options: [IDE Primary Master] [IDE Primary Slave] [IDE Secondary Master] [IDE Secondary Slave] When Instant Music is enabled, the PS/2 keyboard power up feature is automatically disabled. See page 5-14 for details. The above item appears only if you enabled the Instant Music item.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-27 4.5 P ower menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the Advanced Power Management (APM). Select an item then press Enter to display the configuration options. Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] BIOS -> AML ACPI table [Enabled] APM Configuration Hardware Monitor Configure CPU. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.5.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the ACPI state to be used for system suspend. Configuration options: [S1 (POS) Only] [S3 Only] [Auto] 4.5.2 Repost V ideo on S3 Resume [No] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. Configuration options: [No] [Y es] 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [No] Allows you to add more tables for ACPI 2.0 specifications. Configuration options: [No] [Y es] 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ACPI support in the ASIC. When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.5.5 BIOS -> AML ACPI T able [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the inclusion of the BIOS ->AML exchange pointer to (X)RSDT pointer list. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Power Management/APM [Enabled] Video Power Down Mode [Suspend] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend] Suspend Time Out [Disabled] Throttle Slow Clock Ratio [50%] System Thermal [Disabled] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By External Modem [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] APM Configuration Enabled or disable APM. 4.5.6 APM Configuration Power Management/APM [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Power Management (APM) feature. Configuration options: [Disbaled] [Enabled] V ideo Power Down Mode [Suspend] Allows you to select the video power down mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Standby] [Suspend] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend] Allows you to select the hard disk power down mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Standby] [Suspend] Suspend T ime Out [Disabled] Allows you to select the specified time at which the system goes on suspend. Configuration options: [Disabled] [1-2 Min] [2-3 Min] [4-5 Min] [8-9 Min] [10 Min] [20 Min] [30 Min] [40 Min] [50 Min] [60 Min] Throttle Slow Clock Ratio [50%] Allows you to select the duty cycle in throttle mode. Configuration options: [87.5%] [75.0%] [62.5%] [50%] [37.5%] [25%] [12.5%] System Thermal [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the system thermal feature to generate a power management event. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-29 Power Button Mode [On/Off] Allows the system to go into On/Off mode or suspend mode when the power button is pressed. Configuration options: [On/Of f] [Suspend] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to Power Of f, the system goes into off state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either of f or on state whatever was the system state before the AC power loss. Configuration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable R TC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to Enabled, the items R TC Alarm Date, RTC Alarm Hour , RTC Alarm Minute, and RTC Alarm Second appear with set values. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By External Modem [Disabled] This allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-of f mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI LAN or modem card. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] This parameter allows you to use specific keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the first try . T urning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is of f causes an initialization string that turns the system power on.
4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit CPU Temperature [44°C/111°F] MB Temperature [36°C/96.5°F] Power Temperature [N/A] Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Fan Speed [2250RPM] Chassis Fan Speed [XXX RPM] Power Fan Speed [XXX RPM] VCORE Voltage [1.550V] 3.3V Voltage [3.386V] 5V Voltage [4.890V] 12V Voltage [11.900V] Hardware Monitor CPU temperature 4.5.7 Hardware Monitor MB T emperature [xxxC/xxxF] CPU T emperature [xxxC/xxxF] POWER T emperature [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard, CPU, and power supply temperatures. Select Disabled if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. Q-Fan Control [Disabled] This item allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efficient system operation. When this field is set to [Enabled], the Fan Speed Ratio item appears to allow selection of the appropriate fan speed ratio. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-31 Fan Speed Ratio [1 1/16] This item allows you to select the appropriate fan speed ratio for the system. The default [1 1/16] is the minimum fan speed ratio. Select a higher ratio if you installed additional devices and the system requires more ventilation. Configuration options: [1 1/16] [12/16] [13/16] [14/16] [15/16] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU, chassis, and power fan speeds in rotations per minute (RPM). If any of the fans is not connected to the motherboard, the specific field shows N/A. VCORE V oltage, 3.3V V oltage, 5V V oltage, 12V V oltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators. The above item appears only when the Q-Fan Control item is set to Enabled. If any of the monitored items is out of range, the following error message appears: âHardware Monitor found an error . Enter Power setup menu for detailsâ. Y ou will then be prompted to âPress F1 to continue or DEL to enter SETUPâ.
4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup 4.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press Enter to display the sub-menu. Boot Device Priority Hard Disk Drives Boot Settings Configuration Security Specifies the Boot Device Priority sequence. Boot Settings Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIV] 2nd Boot Device [PM-ST320413A] 3rd Boot Device [PS-ASUS CD-S340] Boot Device Priority Specifies the boot sequence from the available devices. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding type menu. 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appear on the screen depends on the the number of devices installed in the system. Configuration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-33 4.6.2 Hard disk drives Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 1st Boot Device [PM-ST320413A] 2nd Boot Device [PS-ASUS CD-S340] Boot Device Priority Specifies the boot sequence from the available devices. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding type menu. 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [(Hard disk drive model name)] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available hard disk drives. The number of items that appear on the screen depends on the the number of hard disk drives installed in the system. Configuration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] 4.6.3 Boot Settings Configuration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Typematic Rate [Fast] Parity Check [Disabled] Boot to OS/2 [No] Wait for âF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Boot Settings Configuration Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system. Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-34 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Sets the display mode for option ROM. Configuration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Configuration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] T ypematic Rate [Fast] Allows you to select the keyboard typematic rate. Configuration options: [Slow] [Fast] Parity Check [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the memory parity error checking. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Boot to OS/2 [No] Allows you to specify the OS/2 compatibility mode. Configuration options: [No] [Y es] W ait for âF1â If Error [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system waits for F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hit âDEL â Message Display [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST . Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Make sure that the above item is set to [Enabled] if you wish to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. Full Screen Logo [Enabled] This allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-35 4.6.4 Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press Enter to display the configuration options. Supervisor Password Not Installed User Password Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Security Settings <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password. Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed . After you have set a password, this item shows Installed . T o set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press Enter . 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of letters and/or numbers, then press Enter . Y our password should have at least six characters. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you have successfully set your password. The Supervisor Password item now shows Installed . T o change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. T o clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press Enter . The message âPassword Uninstalledâ appears. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear clear it by erasing the CMOS Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM. See section â2.7 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM.
4-36 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup User Access Level (Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Configuration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility . V iew Only allows access but does not allow change to any field. Limited allows change to only selected fields, such as Date and T ime. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the fields in the Setup utility . Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you have set a password, this item shows Installed . T o set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press Enter . 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of letters and/or numbers, then press Enter . Y our password should have at least six characters. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you have successfully set your password. The User Password item now shows Installed . Supervisor Password Installed User Password Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Security Settings <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password. After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-37 T o change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Clear User Password Select this item if you wish to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility . When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Configuration options: [Setup] [Always] Boot Sector V irus Protection [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the boot sector virus protection. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.7 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. Exit Options Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit.
4-38 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Exit & Save Changes Once you are finished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. The CMOS RAM is sustained by an onboard backup battery and stays on even when the PC is turned of f. When you select this option, a confirmation window appears. Select [Y es] to save changes and exit. Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to fields other than system date, system time, and password, the BIOS asks for a confirmation before exiting. Discard Changes This option allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a confirmation appears. Select [Y es] to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Load Setup Defaults This option allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a confirmation window appears. Select [Y es] to load default values. Select Exit Saving Changes or make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Pressing <Enter> saves the changes while exiting.
Chapter 5 Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard Chapter summar y 5.1 Install an operating system ........................... 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ................................ 5-1 5.3 Software information ..................................... 5-7 5.4 RAID 0/ RAID 1 / RAID 0 1 / JBOD ..................... configurations .............................................. 5-25 5.5 Intel ® RAID for Serial A T A configuration .... 5-34 5.6 Using Intel ® / VIA ® Makedisk.exe ................ 5-38 5.7 Marvell ® V irtual Cable T ester⢠(VCT) ................ T echnology ................................................... 5-39
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-1 5. 1 Install an oper ating system This motherboard supports Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP operating system (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates so you can maximize the features of your hardware. 5.2 Suppor t CD infor mation The support CD that came with the motherboard contains useful software and several utility drivers that enhance the motherboard features. 5.2.1 Running the support CD T o begin using the support CD, simply insert the CD into your CD-ROM drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . Click an icon to display more information Click an item to install Because motherboard settings and hardware options vary , use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for general reference only . Refer to your OS documentation for more information. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website for updates. If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the file ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the CD.
5-2 Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.2 Drivers menu The drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. VIA RAID Driver This item installs the VIA ® RAID support driver . AD1985 Audio Driver and Applications This item executes the wizard to install the SoundMAX audio driver and applications. Intel Chipset Inf Update Program This item installs the Intel ® Chipset INF Update Program that enables Plug-n-Play INF support for Intel ® chipset components. This utility installs to the target system the Windows INF files that outline to the operating system how the chipset components will be configured. Y ou may install this utility in three modes: interactive, silent and unattended preload. The interactive mode requires user input during installation. This is not required in the silent and unattended preload modes. Refer to the online help or readme file that came with the utility . Intel Application Accelerator Driver This item installs the Intel Application Accelerator Driver . If you are using Windows ® XP , this driver allows RAID 0 configuration for the Serial A T A channels. This driver can only be installed when the RAID function of S- A T A is enabled.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-3 5.2.3 Utilities menu The Utilities menu shows the applications and other software that the motherboard supports. ASUS PC Probe This smart utility monitors the fan speed, CPU temperature, and system voltages, and alerts you on any detected problems. This utility helps you keep your computer at a healthy operating condition. Install ASUS Update This program allows you to download the latest version of the BIOS from the ASUS website. Screen display and driver options may not be the same for other operating system versions. Before using the ASUS Update, make sure that you have an Internet connection so you can connect to the ASUS website. Microsoft Direct X 8.1 Driver This item installs the Microsoft V8.0a driver . USB 2.0 Driver This item installs the Universal Serial Bus 2.0 driver . 3Com Gigabit LOM (3C940) Driver This item executes the dialogue box interface for the 3COM NIC driver and diagnostics installation.
5-4 Chapter 5: Software support PC-CILLIN 2002 This item installs the PC-cillin 2002 anti-virus program. View the PC-cillin online help for detailed information. Adobe Acrobat Reader V5.0 This item installs the Adobe Acrobat Reader V5.0. The Acrobat Reader software is for viewing files saved in Portable Document Format (PDF). Winbond V oice Editor This item installs the Winbond V oice Editor software application. ASUS Screen Saver This item installs the ASUS screen saver . E-Color 3Deep This item installs the 3Deep software. 3Deep is the first application that gives online gamers the competitive edge in multi-player skirmishes. This application removes dark washed-out graphics to deliver true vibrant colors. 5.2.4 ASUS Contact Information Clicking the ASUS Contact Information tab displays as stated. Y ou may also find this information on page x of this user guide. Screen display and utilities option may not be the same for other operating system versions.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-5 5.2.5 Other information The icons on the top right corner of the screen give additional information on the motherboard and the contents of the support CD. Click an icon to display the specified information. Motherboard Info The window displays the general specifications of the P4P800 Deluxe motherboard. Browse this CD The window displays the support CD contents in graphical format.
5-6 Chapter 5: Software support T echnical Support Form The window displays the ASUS T echnical Support Request Form that you have to fill up when requesting technical support. Filelist The window displays the contents of the support CD and a brief description of each in text format.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-7 5.3 Sof twar e information Most of the applications in the support CD have wizards that will conveniently guide you through the installation. View the online help or readme file that came with the software for more information. This section provides details on the software applications that the motherboard supports. 5.3.1 ASUS Update The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to update the motherboard BIOS and drivers. This utility requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Follow these steps to use the ASUS Update. 2. Select your desired update method, then click Next. 1. Launch the utility from your Windows Start menu: Programs/AsusUpdate Vx.xx.xx/ AsusUpdate The ASUS Update initial screen appears. 3. If you selected updating/ downloading from the Internet, select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network traffic, or choose Auto Select. Click Next.
5-8 Chapter 5: Software support 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the instructions on the succeeding screens to complete the update process. If you selected the option to update the BIOS from a file, a window pops up prompting you to locate the file. Select the file, click Save, then follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. 5.3.2 ASUS MyLogo2⢠The ASUS MyLogo2⢠is automatically installed when you install the ASUS Update utility from the software menu. See section â5.2.3 Utilities menuâ. 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility . See section â5.3.1 ASUS Update.â 2. When prompted for the BIOS update method, select the option âUpdate BIOS from a file.â 3. Specify the location of the BIOS file, such as from a floppy disk. Click Next. Follow these steps to use ASUS MyLogo2. Before using ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature, use the AFUDOS utility to make a copy of your original BIOS file, or obtain the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website. Make sure that the BIOS Item Full Screen Logo is set to [Enabled] if you wish to use ASUS MyLogo2. See page 4-34.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-9 4. From the selection that appears, choose a logo image. Click Next. 6. The next screen prompts you to flash the original BIOS to update it with the new boot logo. Click Flash to update the BIOS. 7. When finished, click Exit, then reboot your computer . Y our system boots with the new boot logo. 5. When you click on an image, it displays larger on the MyLogo2 screen. If you wish, you may create your own boot logo image in GIF , JPG, or BMP file formats. If you wish to make the logo image smaller , click on the arrow on the Ratio item and select your desired scale. Instead of starting from ASUS Update, you may also launch ASUS MyLogo2 directly from the Windows Start menu to change your BIOS boot logo. After you have modified the BIOS file with the new logo, use the ASUS Update utility to upload the new BIOS.
5-10 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.3 ASUS PC Probe The ASUS PC Probe is a convenient utility to continuously monitor your computer systemâs vital components, such as fan rotations, voltages, and temperatures. It also has the DMI Explorer utility that lets you review useful information about your computer , such as hard disk space, memory usage, and CPU type, CPU speed, and internal/external frequencies. Starting ASUS PC Probe When ASUS PC Probe starts, a splash screen appears allowing you to select whether to show the screen again when you open PC Probe or not. T o bypass this startup screen, clear the Show up in next execution check box. The PC Probe icon appears on the taskbar system tray indicating that ASUS PC Probe is running. Clicking the icon allows you to see the status of your PC. T o launch ASUS PC Probe , click the Windows Start button, point to Programs , and then ASUS Utility , and then click Probe Vx.xx .
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-11 Using ASUS PC Probe Monitoring Monitor Summary Shows a summary of the items being monitored. T emperature Monitor Shows the PC temperature (for supported processors only). T emperature Warning threshold adjustment (Move the slider up to increase the threshold level or down to decrease the threshold level) Fan Monitor Shows the PC fan rotation. V oltage Monitor Shows the PC voltages. Fan W arning threshold adjustment (Move the slider up to increase the threshold level or down to decrease the threshold level)
5-12 Chapter 5: Software support Settings Lets you set threshold levels and polling intervals or refresh times of the PCâs temperature, fan rotation, and voltages. History Lets you record the monitoring activity of a certain component of your PC for future reference. Hard Drives Shows the used and free space of the PCâs hard disk drives and the file allocation table or file system used. CPU Cooling System Setup Lets you select when to enable software CPU cooling. When When CPU Overheated is selected, the CPU cooling system is enabled whenever the CPU temperature reaches the threshold value. Fan Control Lets you enable/disable Smart Fan Control. Smart Fan Control adjusts the fan speed automatically based on the current CPU temperature and predefined threshold.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-13 Device Summary Shows a summary of devices present in your PC. DMI Explorer Shows information pertinent to the PC, such as CPU type, CPU speed, and internal/external frequencies, and memory size. Utility Lets you run programs outside of the ASUS Probe modules. T o run a program, click Execute Program . NOTE: This feature is currently unavailable. Information Memory Shows the PC memory load, memory usage, and paging file usage.
5-14 Chapter 5: Software support ASUS PC Probe T ask Bar Icon Right clicking the PC Probe icon brings up a menu to open or exit ASUS PC Probe and pause or resume all system monitoring. When the ASUS PC Probe senses a problem with your PC, portions of the ASUS PC Probe icon change to red, the PC speaker beeps, and the ASUS PC Probe monitor appears. 5.3.4 ASUS Instant Music The ASUS Instant Music is a BIOS-based audio playback feature that allows you to play audio CDs without booting the system. This feature is supported by the onboard audio ACâ97 CODEC, and requires an optical drive (CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, or CD-RW). 1. Instant Music only supports CDs in audio format. 2. Instant Music would not work if you installed and enabled an add-on sound card. 3. Instant Music only supports PS/2 keyboard. T o enable ASUS Instant Music: 1. Connect the analog audio cable from the optical drive (CD-ROM, DVD- ROM, or CD-R W drive) to the 4-pin CD-In connector (labeled CD1) on the motherboard. See section â2.8 Connectorsâ for the connector location. Make sure to connect the CD-ROM audio cable. Otherwise, you cannot control the audio volume using the Instant Music function keys. 2. T urn on the system and enter BIOS by pressing the Delete key during the Power On Self-T ests (POST). 3. In the Advanced Menu Instant Music Configuration menu, select the item Instant Music and set it to Enabled . â
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-15 4. Highlight the Instant Music CDROM item and press Enter to display the CD-ROM options. Select the CD-ROM drive that you wish to use for this feature. 5. Save your changes and exit BIOS Setup. 1. The Scroll Lock LED is fixed to ON after enabling Instant Music. 2. When set to Instant Music mode, the system wake-up features (LAN, keyboard, mouse, USB) are deactivated. In this case, power up the system using the power switch. 3. If the system lost connection or did not detect any optical drive, the Instant Music feature turns OFF (disabled) automatically . A âbeepâ indicates this condition. T o use ASUS Instant Music: 1. Ensure that the power cord is plugged to a grounded power source, so that the system has a standby power . 2. Place the Instant Music keyboard label over Esc and other function keys on your keyboard (top left corner). The keys covered by the label identify the Instant Music special function keys. Instant Music function keys (Set 1) Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 Instant Music function keys (Set 2) As an alternative, you may also use another set of keys on the keyboard as Instant Music function keys. These keys are indicated by marked numbers in the keyboard illustration below . The functions are defined in the illustration on the right. â â â â â â â â â
5-16 Chapter 5: Software support These labels all come with your motherboard package. 3. Connect speakers or a headphone to the Line Out (lime colored) port on the rear panel for audio output. Y ou may also connect a headphone to the headphone jack on the CD- ROM drive front panel. 4. Place an audio CD on the drive. 5. Press Esc to turn ON Instant Music. 6. Press F1 or the Space Bar to play the first track on the CD. If there is no CD on the drive and you press F1 or Space Bar , the drive tray ejects. 7. Refer to the Instant Music function key definitions on the previous page to select other tracks or control the volume. 8. Press F2 or Enter once to stop playing the CD. Press F2 or Enter one more time to eject the CD.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-17 5.3.5 W inbond V oice Editor The Winbond V oice Editor software allows you to customize the vocal POST messages. Install the software from the software menu in the support CD. See section â5.2.3 Utilities menuâ. Follow these steps to use the Winbond V oice Editor . Launching the program Launch the program either from the Winbond V oice Editor icon on your desktop, or from the Windows Start menu, Programs/Winbond V oice Editor/ V oice Editor . The Winbond V oice Editor screen appears. Playing the default wave files T o play the default wave files, simply click on a POST event on the left side of the screen, then click the Play button. Default Messages POST Events T o avoid conflicts, do not run the Winbond V oice Editor while running the ASUS PC Probe. The default language setting is English.
5-18 Chapter 5: Software support Changing the default language 1. Click on the Load button. a window showing the available languages appears. 2. Select your desired language then click Open. The event messages for the language you selected appear on the V oice Editor screen. 3. Click on the Write button to update the EEPROM. 4. Click Y es on the confirmation window that appears. The next time you boot your computer , the POST messages are announced in the language that you selected . For some languages, not all events have a corresponding message due to file size constraints.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-19 Customizing your POST messages If your language is not in the selection or if you wish to record your own POST messages to replace the pre-installed wave files, you may easily do so. Follow these steps to customize your POST messages. 1. Launch the V oice Editor and take note of the list of POST events on the leftmost column of the screen. 2. Prepare your message for each event. 3. Use a recording software, such as Windows Recorder , to record your messages. 4. Save the messages as wave files (.W A V). It is recommended that you save your files in low quality to keep them small. For example, use 8-bit, mono quality at 22Khz sampling rate. 5. From the V oice Editor screen, click on the Add button to display the Add W ave File window . 6. Copy the wave files that you recorded to the database. Close the window when done. The total compressed size for all the wave files must not exceed 1Mbit, so make your messages as short as possible. Y ou may want to create a separate folder for your wave files so you can locate them easily in one place.
5-20 Chapter 5: Software support If you receive an error message telling you that the files exceed the total allowable size, do one or all of the following. ⢠T ry to modify your messages to make them shorter ⢠Save the wave files at a lower quality ⢠Skip lesser used events like FDD Detection, IDE HDD Detection, etc. 7. Click a POST event on the V oice Editor screen, then on the Edit button. The Event Sound Editor window appears. 8. Locate and select your wave file for the event then click on the arrow opposite V oice1. The file you selected appears on the space next to it. 9. Click OK to return to the V oice Editor screen. 10. Do steps 7 to 9 for the other events. 1 1. When done, click the Save button. A window appears prompting you to save your configuration. 12. T ype a file name with a .flh extension, then click Save. 13. Click on the Write button to compress the file and copy into the EEPROM. 14. Click Y es on the confirmation window that appears.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-21 5.3.6 SoundMAX ® 4 XL software The ADI AD1985 AC â97 audio CODEC provides 6-channel audio capability through the SoundMAX4 XL with AudioESP⢠software to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your PC. The software implements high quality audio synthesis/rendering, 3D sound positioning, and advanced voice-input technologies. Follow the installation wizard install the SoundMAX Audio Driver and Application from the support CD that came with the motherboard package to activate the 6-channel audio feature. Y ou must use 4-channel or 6-channel speakers for this setup. SoundMAX 4 XL requires Microsoft Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP . Make sure that one of these operating systems is installed before installing SoundMAX. If the SoundMAX4 XL software is correctly installed, you will find the SoundMAX4 XL icon on the taskbar . From the taskbar , double-click on the SoundMAX4 XL icon to display the SoundMAX Control Panel . SoundMAX4 XL icon
5-22 Chapter 5: Software support Setup wizards Use the speaker and microphone setup wizards to fine tune the gain/ attenuation of the inputs/outputs for optimal audio performance. Y ou may launch the setup wizards by clicking the Configuration button when AudioESP detects and verifies a newly connected peripheral, or by clicking on the icon from the SoundMAX control panel. Speaker wizard Follow the screen instructions to configure the speakers to your desired settings. Microphone wizard Follow the screen instructions to configure the microphone to your desired settings.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-23 Audio preferences The Preferences page of the SoundMAX4 XL allows you to change various audio settings. Listening environment options The SoundMAX4 XL support several audio technologies including SoundMAX SPX⢠Animated Audio, 3DP Aâ¢, MultiDrive⢠5.1, EnvironmentFCâ¢, MacroFX/ZoomFXâ¢, and V irtual Theater Surround.
5-24 Chapter 5: Software support Rear panel audio ports function variation The functions of the Line Out (lime), Line In (blue), and Mic (pink) ports on the rear panel change when you select the 4-channel or 6-channel audio configuration as shown in the following table. Headphone/ 2-Speaker 4-Speaker 6-Speaker Light Blue Line In Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Bass/Center
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-25 5.4 RAID 0 / RAID 1 / RAID 0 1 / JBOD configurations The motherboard includes VIA ® VT6410 high performance IDE RAID controller . It supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 and JBOD with two independent IDE channels. This controller also complies with Scatter/ Gather host DMA mechanism of Programming Interface for Bus Master IDE Controller Revision 1.0 and builts 64 levels of pre-fetch and write buffer inside to improve the transfer rate. The Dual channel master mode hard disk controller supports up to four Enhanced IDE devices. RAID 0 (called data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. T wo hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. RAID 1 (called data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID configuration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. RAID 0 1 is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. The advantage of RAID 0 1 is fast data access (like RAID 0), but with the ability to loose one drive and have a complete duplicate surviving drive or set of drives (like RAID 1). JBOD (for â just a bunch of disksâ or sometimes â just a bunch of drivesâ) is officially termed as â spanningâ. This is used to refer to a computer âs hard disks that havenât been configured according the RAID system to increase fault tolerance and improved data access performance. This RAID system stores the same data redundantly on multiple drives by combining the drives into one larger logical drive. For more information about the VIA ® VT6410 RAID controller , refer to the VIA ® VT6410, IDE RAID Controller user manual found in â\Manual\IAA RAID Manual.docâ of the support CD.
5-26 Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.1 Install the hard disks The VIA ® VT6410 chipset supports UltraDMA133/100/66 hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a RAID set. ⢠If you are creating a RAID 0 (striping) array for perfomance, use two new drives. ⢠If you are creating a RAID 1 (mirroring) array for protection, you can use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive (the new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive). If you use two drives of different sizes, the smaller capacity hard disk will be the base storage size. For example, one hard disk has an 80GB storage capacity and the other hard disk has 60GB storage capacity , the maximum storage capacity for the RAID 1 set is 60GB. Follow these steps to install the hard disks for RAID configuration. 1. Install the IDE hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Using Channel 0: 2.a Connect the RAID IDE cable connector (blue) to the motherboardâs primary IDE RAID slot (PRI_RAID1); 2.b Connect other end of RAID IDE cable connector (black) to the master hard disk; 2.c Connect the remaining IDE RAID connector (gray) to the slave hard disk. 3. Using Channel 1: 3.a Connect the RAID IDE cable connector (blue) to the motherboardâs secondary IDE RAID slot (SEC_RAID1); 3.b Connect other end of RAID IDE cable connector (black) to the master hard disk; 3.c Connect the remaining IDE RAID connector (gray) to the slave hard disk. Before setting up your new RAID array , verify the status of your hard disks. Make sure the Master/Slave jumpers are configured properly .
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-27 5.4.2 Entering VIA ® T ech RAID BIOS Utility 1. Boot-up your computer . 2. During POST , press <T ab> to enter VIA RAID configuration utility . The following menu options will appear . 4. Connect the power cable to the power connector on each drive. 5. Proceed to section 5.4.2 for the next procedure. Channelîîî Drive Nameî Array Nameî Modeî Size(GB) Status Channel0 Masterî XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd Channel0 Slaveîî XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd Channel1 Masterî No Drive Channel1 Slave î No Drive VIA Tech. RAID BIOS Ver 1.00 Create Array Delete Array Create/Delete Spare Select Boot Array Serial Number View Create a RAID array with the hard disk attached to VIA IDE controller F1î : View Array/Disk Status , î : Move to next item Enter: Confirme the selection ESCî : Exit On the upper-right side of the screen is the message and legend box. The keys on the legend box allows you to navigate through the setup menu options. The message describes the function of each menu item. The following lists the keys found in the legend box with their corresponding functions. F1 : View Array/Disk Status â , â : Move to the next item Enter : Confirm the selection ESC : Exit The RAID BIOS information on the setup screen shown is for reference only . What you see on your screen may not be exactly the same as shown.
5-28 Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.3 Create Array 1. In the VIA RAID BIOS utility main menu, select Create Array then press the <Enter> key . The main menu items on the upper-left corner of the screen are replaced with create array menu options. Channelîîî Drive Nameî Array Nameî Modeî Size(GB) Status Channel0 Masterî XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd Channel0 Slaveîî XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd Channel1 Masterî No Drive Channel1 Slave î No Drive VIA Tech. RAID BIOS Ver 1.00 Auto Setup For Data Security Array Mode RAID 1 (Mirroring) Select Disk Drives Start Create Process Create a RAID array with the hard disk attached to VIA IDE controller F1î : View Array/Disk Status , î : Move to next item Enter: Confirm the selection ESCî : Exit 5.4.3.1 RAID 0 for performance 1. Select the second option item Array Mode , then press the <Enter> key . The RAID system setting pop-up menu appears. 2. Select RAID 0 for performance from the menu and press <Enter>. From this point, you may choose to auto-configure the RAID array by selecting Auto Setup for Performance or manually configure the RAID array for stripped sets. If you want to manually configure the RAID array continue with next step, otherwise, proceed to step #5. 3. Select Select Disk Drives , then press <Enter>. Use arrow keys to select disk drive/s, then press <Enter> to mark selected drive. An asterisk is placed before the selected drive. 4. Select Block Size , then press <Enter> to set array block size. A list of valid array block sizes are displayed on a pop-up menu. RAID 1 for data protection RAID 0/1 RAID SPAN for capacity RAID 0 for performance
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-29 5. Select Start Create Process and press <Enter> to setup hard disk for RAID system. The following confirmation message appears: Use arrow keys to move selection bar on items and press <Enter> to select. Press âYâ to confirm or âNâ to return to the configuration options. 5.4.3.2 RAID 1 for data protection 1. Select the second option item Array Mode , then press the <Enter> key . The RAID system setting pop-up menu appears. 2. Select RAID 1 for data protection from the menu and press <Enter>. Select next task from pop-up menu. The task Create only creates the mirrored set without creating a backup. Create and duplicate creates both mirrored set and backup. TIP: For server systems, it is recommended to use a lower array block size. For multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing, a higher array block size is recommended for optimum performance The same confirmation message appears when the Auto Setup for Performance option is selected. The data on the selected disks will be destroyed. Continue? Press Y/N 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K RAID 0 for performance RAID 1 for data protection RAID 0/1 RAID SPAN for capacity RAID 1 for data protection Create only Create and duplicate Create only 3. Select task and press <Enter>. The screen returns to Create Array menu items. From this point, you may choose to auto-configure the RAID array by selecting Auto Setup for Data Security or manually configure the RAID array for mirrored sets. If you want to manually configure the RAID array continue with next step, otherwise, proceed to step #5.
5-30 Chapter 5: Software support The task Create only creates the combination of stripped and mirrored set without creating a backup. Create and duplicate creates both combination of stripped and mirrored sets with backup. 4. Select Select Disk Drives , then press <Enter>. Use arrow keys to select disk drive/s, then press <Enter> to mark selected drive. ( An asterisk is placed before a selected drive. ) 5. Select Start Create Process and press <Enter> to setup hard disk for RAID system. The following confirmation message appears: Press âYâ to confirm or âNâ to return to the configuration options. 5.4.3.3 RAID 0 1 (Safety and Performance) 1. Select the second option item Array Mode , then press the <Enter> key . The RAID system setting pop-up menu appears. 2. Select RAID 0/1 from the menu and press <Enter>. Select next task from pop-up menu. The same confirmation message appears when the Auto Setup for Data Security option is selected. The data on the selected disks will be destroyed. Continue? Press Y/N RAID 0 for performance RAID 1 for data protection RAID 0/1 RAID SPAN for capacity RAID 0/1 Create only Create and duplicate Create only 3. Select task and press <Enter>. The screen returns to Create Array menu items. From this point, you may choose to auto-configure the RAID array by selecting Auto Setup (Safe, Performance) or manually configure the RAID array for mirrored sets. If you want to manually configure the RAID array continue with next step. Screen reference on Auto Setup for Data Security can be found in step #6. 4. Select Select Disk Drives , then press <Enter>. Use arrow keys to select disk drive/s, then press <Enter> to mark selected drive.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-31 5. Select Block Size , then press <Enter> to set array block size. A list of valid array block sizes are displayed on a pop-up menu. Press âYâ to confirm or âNâ to return to the configuration options. 6. Select Start Create Process and press <Enter> to setup hard disk for RAID system. The following confirmation message appears: Use arrow keys to move selection bar on items and press <Enter> to select. TIP: For server systems, it is recommended to use a lower array block size. For multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing, a higher array block size is recommended for optimum performance The same confirmation message appears when the Auto Setup (Safe, Performance) option is selected. 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K The data on the selected disks will be destroyed. Continue? Press Y/N 5.4.3.4 RAID SP AN for capacity 1. Select the second option item Array Mode , then press the <Enter> key . The RAID system setting pop-up menu appears. RAID 0 for performance RAID 1 for data protection RAID 0/1 RAID SPAN for capacity RAID SPAN for capacity 2. Select RAID SP AN for capacity from the menu and press <Enter>. From this point, you may choose to auto-configure the RAID array by selecting Auto Setup for Capacity or manually configure the RAID array for spanned sets. If you want to manually configure the RAID array continue with next step. Screen reference on Auto Setup for Capacity can be found in step #4 3. Select Select Disk Drives , then press <Enter>. Use arrow keys to select disk drive/s, then press <Enter> to mark selected drive.( An asterisk is placed before a selected drive. )
5-32 Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.4 Delete Array 1. In the VIA RAID BIOS utility main menu, select Delete Array then press the <Enter> key . The focus is directed to the list of channel used for IDE RAID arrays. 2. Press the <Enter> key to select a RAID array to delete. The following confirmation message appears. Press âYâ to confirm or âNâ to return to the configuration options. 5.4.5 Create/Delete Spare 1. In the VIA RAID BIOS utility main menu, select Create/Delete Spare then press the <Enter> key . The focus is directed to the list of channel used for IDE RAID arrays. 2. Press the <Enter> key to select a hard disk drive to delete or used to create a spare. The following confirmation message appears. Press âYâ to confirm or âNâ to return to the configuration options. 4. Select Start Create Process and press <Enter> to setup hard disk for RAID system. The following confirmation message appears: Press âYâ to confirm or âNâ to return to the configuration options. The same confirmation message appears when the Auto Setup for Capacity option is selected. The data on the selected disks will be destroyed. Continue? Press Y/N The selected array will be destroyed. Are you sure? Continue? Press Y/N The selected drive will be destroyed. Are you sure? Continue? Press Y/N
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-33 5.4.6 Select Boot Array 1. In the VIA RAID BIOS utility main menu, select Select Boot Array then press the <Enter> key . The focus is directed to the list of channel used for IDE RAID arrays. 2. Press the <Enter> key to select a RAID array for boot. The Status of the selected array will change to Boot. Press <ESC> key to go return to menu items. Follow the same procedure to deselect the the boot array . 5.4.7 Serial Number V iew 1. In the VIA RAID BIOS utility main menu, select Serial Number View then press the <Enter> key . The focus is directed to the list of channel used for IDE RAID arrays. Move the selection bar on each item and the serial number is displayed at the bottom of the screen. This option is useful for identifying same model disks. Channelîîî Drive Nameî Array Nameî Modeî Size(GB) Status Channel0 Master î XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd Channel0 Slaveîî XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd Channel1 Masterî No Drive Channel1 Slave î No Drive VIA Tech. RAID BIOS Ver 1.00 Create Array Delete Array Create/Delete Spare Select Boot Array Serial Number View Create a RAID array with the hard disk attached to VIA IDE controller F1î : View Array/Disk Status , î : Move to next item Enter: Confirme the selection ESCî : Exit Serial Number:îîî VJF41646 Channelîîî Drive Nameîî Array Nameîî Modeî Size(GB) Status [ ] Channel0 Masterî XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd [ ]Channel0 Slaveî XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd Channel1 Masterî No Drive Channel1 Slave î No Drive ESC î: E x it
5-34 Chapter 5: Software support 5.5 Intel ® RAID for Serial A TA configuration This motherboard supports Intel ® RAID 0 for Serial A T A drives through the Intel ® ICH5R chipset. The Serial A T A as RAID option must be enabled in the BIOS before the system can load the Intel ® RAID Option ROM code for Intel ® RAID. The Intel ® RAID Option ROM is a standard PnP (Plug and Play) option ROM that provides a pre-operating system user interface for the Intel ® RAID implementation. It also allows the boot order to be selected from within the BIOS setup utility . 5.5.2 Installing Serial A T A (SA T A) hard disks Installing Serial A T A (SA T A) hard disks requires the use of a new SA T A data cable (4-conductor) which supports the Serial A T A protocol and a SA T A power cable. Either end of the SA T A data cable can be connected to the SA T A hard disk or the SA T A connector on the motherboard. Follow the given steps for correct cable installation: 1. Attach either cable end to the SA T A connector on the motherboard. 2. Attach the other cable end to the SA T A hard disk. ⢠Both the data and power SA T A cables are new cables. Y ou cannot use older 40-pin 80-conductor IDE or regular IDE power cables with SA T A hard drives. ⢠Carefully follow any technical instructions that come from the hard disk manufacturer . 5.5.1 BIOS Configuration 1. Enter the BIOS setup program by pressing the <Del> key after the Power-On Self T est (POST) memory test begins. 2. Select the Main menu, then the IDE Configuration menu. 3. If necessary , switch the Onboard IDE Operate Mode option from [Legacy Mode] to [Enhanced Mode]. 4. Switch the Configure S-A T A as RAID option to [Y es]. 5. Press <F10> to save the BIOS settings and exit the BIOS setup program. ⢠For more information about the Intel ® RAID for SA T A configuration, refer to the Intel Application Accelerator , RAID Edition, User âs manual in â\Manual\IAA RAID Manual.docâ of the support CD. ⢠The Intel ® RAID feature is available in WinXP only .
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-35 5.5.4 Creating a RAID V olume [ HELP ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length taht can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and can not contain special characters. Intel(R) Integrated RAID for Serial ATA - RAID Configuration Utility Copyright(C) 2003 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. v3.x.x.xxxx [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] Name: RAID_Volume1 Strip Size: 64KB RAID Level: RAID0(Striping) Capacity: 37.2GB îî Create Volume [ ]-Changeî [ ]-Changeî [TAB]-Nextî [TAB]-Nextî [ESC] Previous Menuîî [ESC] Previous Menuîî [Enter]-Select [Enter]-Select 5.5.3 Creating, Deleting, and Resetting RAID Sets The Serial A T A RAID set must be configured in the RAID Configuration utility . This configuration can be done by the Intel ® RAID Option ROM. During the Power-On Self T est (POST), the following message will appear for a few seconds: Press <Ctrl-I> to enter Raid Configuration Utility . After this message appears, press the <Ctrl> and <I> keys simultaneously , the following screen menu appears. [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None defined. Non-RAID Disks: Port Drive Modelîî Serial #îî Sizeîî Statusîî Bootable 0 ST320413Aîîî xxxxxxxxîî 18.6GBî Normalîî Yes 1 ST320413Aîîî xxxxxxxxîî 18.6GBî Normalîî Yes Intel(R) Integrated RAID for Serial ATA - RAID Configuration Utility Copyright(C) 2003 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. v3.x.x.xxxx [ MAIN MENU ] 1.î Create RAID Volume 2.î Delete RAID Volume 3.î Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4.î Exit [ ]-Selectîî [ ]-Selectîî [ESC] Exitîî [ESC] Exitîî [Enter]-Select Menu [Enter]-Select Menu Follow the given steps to create a RAID 0 V olume 1. Select option 1 Create RAID V olume and press the <Enter> key .
5-36 Chapter 5: Software support 2. Select the stripe value for the RAID 0 array by scrolling through the available values by using the Up and Down arrow keys and pressing the <Enter> key . 3. The available values range from 8 KB to 128 KB increments. The strip value should be chosen based on the planned drive usage. Some suggested selections are listed below . The default selection is 64 KB. ⢠16 KB - low disk usage ⢠64 KB - typical disk usage ⢠128 KB - performance disk usage 4. Press the <Enter> key again to the Create V olume prompt to create the array . Confirm this selection by pressing the <Y> key after the prompt. Are you sure you want to create this volume (Y/N) 5. Scroll to option 4 Exit and press the <Enter> key to exit the RAID configuration utility . Confirm the exit by pressing <Y> key . 5.5.5 Deleting a RAID V olume [ HELP ] Deleting a volume will destroy the volume data on the drive(s) and cause any member disks to become available as non-RAID disks. WARNING: îEXISTING DATA WITHING THIS VOLUME WILL BE LOST AND NON-RECOVERABLE Intel(R) Integrated RAID for Serial ATA - RAID Configuration Utility Copyright(C) 2003 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. v3.x.x.xxxx [ DELETE ARRAY MENU ] [ ]-Changeî [ ]-Changeî [TAB]-Nextî [TAB]-Nextî [<ESC>]-Previous Menuî [<ESC>]-Previous Menuî [<DEL>]-Delete Volume [<DEL>]-Delete Volume Nameîîî Levelîî Drives î Capacityî Statusîî Bootable RAID_Volume1î RAID0(Stripe)î 2îî 37.2GB î Normal îî Yes T ake caution in using this option; All data on the RAID drives will be lost!
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-37 5.5.6 Reset RAID Data 1. Select option 3 Reset RAID Data and press the <Enter> key to delete the RAID set and remove any RAID structures from the drives. [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None defined. Non-RAID Disks: Port Drive Modelîî Serial #îî Sizeîî Statusîî Bootable 0 ST320413Aîîî xxxxxxxxîî 18.6GBî Normalîî Yes 1 ST320413Aîîî xxxxxxxxîî 18.6GBî Normalîî Yes Intel(R) Integrated RAID for Serial ATA - RAID Configuration Utility Copyright(C) 2003 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. v3.x.x.xxxx [ MAIN MENU ] 1.î Create RAID Volume 2.î Delete RAID Volume 3.î Reset Disks to Non-RaID 4.î Exit [ ]-Selectîî [ ]-Selectîî [ESC] Exitîî [ESC] Exitîî [Enter]-Select Menu [Enter]-Select Menu 2. Confirm the volume deletion by pressing the <Y> key . T ake caution in using this option; All data on the RAID drives and any internal RAID structures will be lost! Resetting all RAID data will remove any internal RAID structures from all RAID disks, including disks with working volumes. These structures are used to maintain the RAID volumes. By removing these structures, the drive will revert back to a Non-RAID disk that can then be used or reallocated to a new RAID volume. [ RESET ALL DATA RAID DATA ] WARNING: Selecting "Yes" will cause all data on any RAID disk (RAID Volume or Other RAID Disk) to be lost. Are you sure you want to destroy all RAID data (Y/N): 1. Select option 2 Delete RAID V olume and press the <Enter> key to delete the RAID set. 2. Press the <Delete> key to delete the RAID volume. Are you sure you want to delete this volume? ALL DATA IN THE VOLUME WILL BE LOST!! Are you sure you want to delete volume "RAID_Volume1"? (Y/N) [ VOLUME DELETE VERIFICATION ] 3. Confirm the volume deletion by pressing the <Y> key .
5-38 Chapter 5: Software support Write-protect the floppy disk to avoid computer virus infection. 5.6 Using Intel ® / VIA ® Makedisk.exe Important Notes 1. The Makedisk.exe utility enables you to create a floppy disk with the RAID driver necessary when configuring RAID installations. 2. The Makedisk.exe utility for Intel ® RAID is located in â/Drivers/chipset/IAA/Makedisk.exeâ of the support CD. 3. The Makedisk.exe utility for VIA ® RAID is located in â/Drivers/VIARAID/Makedisk.exeâ of the support CD. The Makedisk.exe utility for Intel ® RAID is supported in Windows ® XP⢠only . 4. During OS installation, press the âF6â key and insert the created driver floppy disk to upload RAID driver . A floppy disk with VIA ® RAID driver is required when installing Windows ® XPâ¢/ 2000⢠or NT⢠operating systems. Make sure to create a RAID driver floppy disk using Makedisk.exe utility for VIA ® RAID function before installing your operating system.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-39 5.7 Mar vell ® Vir tual Cable T ester⢠(VCT) T echnology The P4P800 Deluxe motherboard supports the Marvell ® V irtual Cable T ester (VCT) T echnology . The VCT virtually diagnose and report cable faults using the T ime Domain Reflectometry (TDR). With this essential tool, installation and network diagnosis have never been easier . The VCT technology detects and reports open and shorted cables with up to 1 meter of accuracy . It also detects impedance mismatches, pair swaps, pair polarity problems and pair skew problems of up to 64ns. VCT remarkably reduces networking and support costs, complementing a highly manageable and controlled network system. Also, this tool can be incorporated in the network systems software making it ideal for field support as well as development diagnostics. Using the V irtual Cable T ester⢠1. Right click on the My Computer icon on your desktop, on the pop- up menu, click on Properties to display the System Properties dialog box. 2. Locate Network adapters and select 3COM Gigabit LOM (3C940) from the list. Click on the P roperties button. 3. From the 3Com Gigabit LOM (3C940) Properties dialogue box, select the Diagnostics tab.
5-40 Chapter 5: Software support 4. Click on the (VCT) V irtual Cable T ester button. The following screen display appears. 5. Click on Run to execute test. ⢠The V irtual Cable T ester⢠(VCT) feature is supported in Windows ® XP⢠and Windows ® 2000⢠operating systems only . ⢠The Run button on the VCT T ester dialogue box is disabled if no problem is detected on the network.
ii Copyright © 2003 ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. All Rights Reserved. No part of this manual, including the products and software described in it, may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form or by any means, except documentation kept by the purchaser for backup purposes, without the express written permission of ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (âASUSâ). Product warranty or service will not be extended if: (1) the product is repaired, modified or altered, unless such repair , modification of alteration is authorized in writing by ASUS; or (2) the serial number of the product is defaced or missing. ASUS PROVIDES THIS MANUAL âAS ISâ WITHOUT W ARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANT ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL ASUS, ITS DIRECT ORS, OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT , SPECIAL, INCIDENT AL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF USE OR DA T A, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS AND THE LIKE), EVEN IF ASUS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY DEFECT OR ERROR IN THIS MANUAL OR PRODUCT . SPECIFICA TIONS AND INFORMA TION CONT AINED IN THIS MANUAL ARE FURNISHED FOR INFORMA TIONAL USE ONL Y , AND ARE SUBJECT T O CHANGE A T ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE, AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED AS A COMMITMENT BY ASUS. ASUS ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY ERRORS OR INACCURACIES THA T MA Y APPEAR IN THIS MANUAL, INCLUDING THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTW ARE DESCRIBED IN IT . Products and corporate names appearing in this manual may or may not be registered trademarks or copyrights of their respective companies, and are used only for identification or explanation and to the ownersâ benefit, without intent to infringe. E1323 Revised Edition V3 May 2003
iii FCC/CDC statements ..................................................................... vi Safety information ......................................................................... vii About this guide ............................................................................ viii How this guide is organized ................................................ viii Conventions used in this guide ............................................. ix Where to find more information ............................................. ix ASUS contact information ............................................................... x P4P800 Deluxe specifications summary ........................................ xi Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.1 W elcome! ........................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Package contents ............................................................... 1-1 1.3 Special features .................................................................. 1-2 1.3.1 Product highlights .................................................. 1-2 1.3.2 V alue-added solutions ............................................ 1-6 1.4 Motherboard overview ........................................................ 1-7 1.4.1 Major components ................................................. 1-7 1.4.2 Core specifications ................................................ 1-9 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.1 Motherboard installation ..................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Placement direction ............................................... 2-1 2.1.2 Screw holes ........................................................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard layout ............................................................ 2-2 2.3 Before you proceed ............................................................ 2-3 2.4 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ........................................... 2-4 2.4.1 Overview ................................................................ 2-4 2.4.2 Installing the CPU .................................................. 2-5 2.4.3 Installing the heatsink and fan ............................... 2-7 2.4.4 Connecting the CPU fan cable .............................. 2-9 2.5 System memory ............................................................... 2-10 2.5.1 Overview .............................................................. 2-10 2.5.2 Memory configurations ......................................... 2-1 1 2.5.3 Installing a DIMM ................................................. 2-14 2.5.4 Removing a DIMM ............................................... 2-14 2.6 Expansion slots ................................................................ 2-15 2.6.1 Installing an expansion card ................................ 2-15 2.6.2 Configuring an expansion card ............................ 2-15 2.6.3 PCI slots .............................................................. 2-17 2.6.4 AGP slot ............................................................... 2-18 2.6.5 WiFi slot ............................................................... 2-19 2.7 Jumpers ............................................................................ 2-20 2.8 Connectors ....................................................................... 2-23 Contents
iv Chapter 3: Powering up 3.1 Starting up for the first time ................................................ 3-1 3.2 V ocal POST Messages ...................................................... 3-2 3.3 Powering of f the computer ................................................. 3-4 Chapter 4: BIOS setup 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS .................................... 4-1 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk ............................. 4-1 4.1.2 Using AFUDOS to update the BIOS ...................... 4-1 4.1.3 Using AFUDOS to copy BIOS from PC ................. 4-3 4.1.4 Using ASUS EZ Flash to update the BIOS ............ 4-4 4.1.5 Recovering the BIOS with CrashFree BIOS 2 ....... 4-5 4.2 BIOS Setup program .......................................................... 4-7 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen ................................................ 4-8 4.2.2 Menu bar ................................................................ 4-8 4.2.3 Navigation keys ..................................................... 4-8 4.2.4 Menu items ............................................................ 4-9 4.2.5 Sub-menu items ..................................................... 4-9 4.2.6 Configuration fields ................................................ 4-9 4.2.7 Pop-up window ...................................................... 4-9 4.2.8 Scroll bar ................................................................ 4-9 4.2.9 General help .......................................................... 4-9 4.3 Main menu ........................................................................ 4-10 4.3.1 System T ime [xx:xx:xxxx] ..................................... 4-10 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] ............................. 4-10 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] ....................... 4-10 4.3.4 Language [English] .............................................. 4-10 4.3.5 Primary and Secondary IDE Master/Slave; Third ....... and Fourth IDE Master ......................................... 4-1 1 4.3.6 IDE Configuration ................................................ 4-12 4.3.7 System Information .............................................. 4-14 4.4 Advanced menu ............................................................... 4-15 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration ................................... 4-15 4.4.2 CPU Configuration ............................................... 4-18 4.4.3 Chipset ................................................................. 4-18 4.4.4 Onboard Devices Configuration ........................... 4-20 4.4.5 PCI PnP ............................................................... 4-22 4.4.6 USB Configuration ............................................... 4-23 4.4.7 Speech Configuration .......................................... 4-25 4.4.8 Instant Music Configuration ................................. 4-26 4.5 Power menu ..................................................................... 4-27 4.5.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] .......................................... 4-27 4.5.2 Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] ....................... 4-27 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ......................................... 4-27 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] ............................. 4-27 4.5.5 BIOS -> AML ACPI T able [Enabled] ..................... 4-27 Contents
v Contents 4.5.6 APM Configuration ............................................... 4-28 4.5.7 Hardware Monitor ................................................ 4-30 4.6 Boot menu ........................................................................ 4-32 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority ............................................. 4-32 4.6.2 Hard disk drives ................................................... 4-33 4.6.3 Boot Settings Configuration ................................. 4-33 4.6.4 Security ................................................................ 4-35 4.7 Exit menu ......................................................................... 4-37 Chapter 5: Software support 5.1 Install an operating system ................................................. 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ...................................................... 5-1 5.2.1 Running the support CD ........................................ 5-1 5.2.2 Drivers menu ......................................................... 5-2 5.2.3 Utilities menu ......................................................... 5-3 5.2.4 ASUS Contact Information ..................................... 5-4 5.2.5 Other information ................................................... 5-5 5.3 Software information .......................................................... 5-7 5.3.1 ASUS Update ........................................................ 5-7 5.3.2 ASUS MyLogo2⢠.................................................. 5-8 5.3.3 ASUS PC Probe .................................................. 5-10 5.3.4 ASUS Instant Music ............................................. 5-14 5.3.5 Winbond V oice Editor .......................................... 5-17 5.3.6 SoundMAX ® 4 XL software .................................. 5-21 5.4 RAID 0/ RAID 1/ RAID 0 1 / JBOD configurations .......... 5-25 5.4.1 Install the hard disks ............................................ 5-26 5.4.2 Enter the VIA ® T ech RAID BIOS utility ................. 5-27 5.4.3 Create Array ......................................................... 5-28 5.4.4 Delete Array ......................................................... 5-32 5.4.5 Create/Delete Spare ............................................ 5-32 5.4.6 Select Boot Array ................................................. 5-33 5.4.7 Serial Number View ............................................. 5-33 5.5 Intel ® RAID for Serial A T A configurations .......................... 5-34 5.5.1 BIOS Configuration .............................................. 5-34 5.5.2 Installing Serial A T A hard disks ............................ 5-34 5.5.3 Creating, Deleting and Resetting RAID sets ........ 5-35 5.5.4 Creating a RAID V olume ...................................... 5-35 5.5.5 Deleting a RAID V olume ...................................... 5-36 5.5.6 Reset RAID Data ................................................. 5-37 5.6 Using Intel ® / VIA ® Makedisk.exe ...................................... 5-38 5.7 Marvell ® Virtual Cable T ester⢠(VCT) T echnology ........... 5-39
vi FCC/CDC st atements Federal Communications Commission Statement This device complies with FCC Rules Part 15. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ⢠This device may not cause harmful interference, and ⢠This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with manufacturer âs instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However , there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: ⢠Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. ⢠Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver . ⢠Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. ⢠Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Canadian Department of Communications Statement This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. The use of shielded cables for connection of the monitor to the graphics card is required to assure compliance with FCC regulations. Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user âs authority to operate this equipment.
vii Safety information Electrical safety ⢠T o prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet before relocating the system. ⢠When adding or removing devices to or from the system, ensure that the power cables for the devices are unplugged before the signal cables are connected. If possible, disconnect all power cables from the existing system before you add a device. ⢠Before connecting or removing signal cables from the motherboard, ensure that all power cables are unplugged. ⢠Seek professional assistance before using an adpater or extension cord. These devices could interrupt the grounding circuit. ⢠Make sure that your power supply is set to the correct voltage in your area. If you are not sure about the voltage of the electrical outlet you are using, contact your local power company . ⢠If the power supply is broken, do not try to fix it by yourself. Contact a qualified service technician or your retailer . Operation safety ⢠Before installing the motherboard and adding devices on it, carefully read all the manuals that came with the package. ⢠Before using the product, make sure all cables are correctly connected and the power cables are not damaged. If you detect any damage, contact your dealer immediately . ⢠T o avoid short circuits, keep paper clips, screws, and staples away from connectors, slots, sockets and circuitry . ⢠A void dust, humidity , and temperature extremes. Do not place the product in any area where it may become wet. ⢠Place the product on a stable surface. ⢠If you encounter technical problems with the product, contact a qualified service technician or your retailer .
viii About this guide This user guide contains the information you need when installing the ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard. How this guide is organized This manual contains the following parts: ⢠Chapter 1: Product introduction This chapter describes the features of the P4P800 Deluxe motherboard. It includes brief descriptions of the special attributes of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. ⢠Chapter 2: Hardware information This chapter lists the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes description of the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard. ⢠Chapter 3: Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence and gives information on the BIOS beep codes. ⢠Chapter 4: BIOS setup This chapter tells how to change system settings through the BIOS Setup menus. Detailed descriptions of the BIOS parameters are also provided. ⢠Chapter 5: Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package.
ix Conventions used in this guide T o make sure that you perform certain tasks properly , take note of the following symbols used throughout this manual. Where to find more information Refer to the following sources for additional information and for product and software updates. 1. ASUS Websites The ASUS websites worldwide provide updated information on ASUS hardware and software products. The ASUS websites are listed in the ASUS Contact Information on page x. 2. Optional Documentation Y our product package may include optional documentation, such as warranty flyers, that may have been added by your dealer . These documents are not part of the standard package. W ARNING: Information to prevent injury to yourself when trying to complete a task. CAUTION: Information to prevent damage to the components when trying to complete a task. IMPORT ANT : Information that you MUST follow to complete a task. NOTE: T ips and additional information to aid in completing a task.
x ASUS contact infor mation ASUST eK COMPUTER INC. (Asia-Pacific) Address: 150 Li-T e Road, Peitou, T aipei, T aiwan 1 12 General T el: 886-2-2894-3447 General Fax: 886-2-2894-3449 General Email: info@asus.com.tw T echnical Support MB/Others (T el): 886-2-2890-7121 (English) Notebook (T el): 886-2-2890-7122 (English) Desktop/Server (T el): 886-2-2890-7123 (English) Support Fax: 886-2-2890-7698 Web Site: www .asus.com.tw ASUS COMPUTER INTERNA TIONAL (America) Address: 44370 Nobel Drive, Fremont, CA 94538, USA General Fax: 1-502-933-8713 General Email: tmd1@asus.com T echnical Support Support Fax: 1-502-933-8713 General Support: 1-502-995-0883 Notebook Support: 1-510-739-3777 x51 10 Web Site: www .asus.com Support Email: tsd@asus.com ASUS COMPUTER GmbH (Germany and Austria) Address: Harkortstr . 25, 40880 Ratingen, BRD, Germany General Email: sales@asuscom.de (for marketing requests only) General Fax: 49-2102-9599-31 T echnical Support Support Hotlines: (Components) 49-2102-9599-0 (Notebook PC) 49-2102-9599-10 Support Fax: 49-2102-9599-1 1 Support Email: www .asuscom.de/kontakt (for online support) Web Site: www .asuscom.de
xi P4P800 Deluxe specifications summar y CPU Chipset Front Side Bus (FSB) Memory Expansion slots IDE RAID IDE / Serial A T A (optional) IEEE 1394 (optional) Audio (optional) LAN (optional) Socket 478 for Intel ® Pentium ® 4 / Celeron up to 3.06 GHz Supports Intel ® Hyper-Threading T echnology Supports Intel ® Prescott CPU North Bridge: Intel 82865PE South Bridge: Intel ICH5R w/ RAID 0 support 800/533/400 MHz Dual-channel memory architecture Supports PC3200/2700/2100 unbuffered non-ECC DDR DIMMs 4 x 184-pin DDR DIMM sockets for up to 4GB memory 1 x AGP 8X (1.5V only) 5 x PCI 1 x WiFi slot Supported by South Bridge (ICH5R) - 2 x UltraDMA100 support for 4 drives - 2 x Serial A T A with RAID 0 function Supported by VIA ® 6410 RAID controller - 2 x UltraDMA 133 connector support for 4 drives with RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 and RAID JBOD VIA 6307 2 x IEEE 1394 ports ADI AD1985 6-channel audio CODEC 1 x S/PDIF out 3COM 3C940 Gbit PCI LAN controller AI BIOS solutions: ASUS CrashFree BIOS 2 ASUS Q-Fan T echnology ASUS POST Reporter⢠Intelligent CPU frequency tuner ASUS JumperFree Adjustable CPU V CORE , memory and AGP voltages SFS (Stepless Frequency Selection) from 100MHz to 400MHz at 1MHz increments C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) ASUS MyLogo 2 Instant Music ASUS EZ Flash Multi-language BIOS (continued on the next page) CPU Chipset Front Side Bus (FSB) Memory Expansion slots Storage IEEE 1394 AI Audio AI Net AI BIOS AI Overclocking Special features
xii Special features Rear panel I/O Internal I/O BIOS features Industry standard Manageability Form Factor Support CD contents P4P800 Deluxe specifications summar y Rear Panel I/O Internal I/O BIOS features Industry standard Manageability Form Factor Support CD contents * Specifications are subject to change without notice. 1 x Parallel port 1 x Serial ports 1 x PS/2 keyboard port 1 x PS/2 mouse port 4 x USB 2.0/USB 1.1 ports 1 x RJ-45 port (optional) 1 x S/PDIF-out port 1 x IEEE 1394 port Line In/Line Out/Microphone ports 2 x USB 2.0/1.1 connector for 4 additional USB ports CPU/Chassis/Power fan connectors 20-pin/4-pin A TX 12V power connectors Chassis intrusion 1 x IEEE 1394 connectors GAME connector S/PDIF out connector CD/AUX/Modem audio connectors Front panel audio connector COM2 connector 4Mb Flash ROM, AMI BIOS, PnP , DMI2.0, ACPI, SM BIOS2.3, CrashFree BIOS 2, Multi-language BIOS, ASUS EZ Flash, ASUS MyLogo2, ASUS Instant Music USB 2.0, PCI 2.2 (PCI 2.3) DMI 2.0, WOL/WOR by PME, WO_USB, WO_KB/MS, chassis intrusion A TX form factor: 12 in x 9.6 in Device drivers ASUS PC Probe ASUS LiveUpdate T rend Micro⢠PC-cillin 2002 anti-virus software
Chapter 1 This chapter describes the features of the P4P800 Deluxe motherboard. It includes brief explanations of the special attributes of the motherboard and the new technology it supports. Product introduction
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard Chapter summar y 1.1 Welcome! ........................................................ 1-1 1.2 Package contents .......................................... 1-1 1.3 Special features ............................................. 1-2 1.4 Motherboard overview ................................... 1-7
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 1-1 1 . 1 Welcome! 1 .2 Package contents Check your P4P800 Deluxe package for the following items. Thank you for buying the ASUS ® P4P800 Deluxe motherboard! The ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard delivers a host of new features and latest technologies making it another standout in the long line of ASUS quality motherboards! The P4P800 Deluxe incorporates the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 Processor in 478- pin package coupled with Intel ® 82865PE and ICH5R chipsets that support the fastest 800MHz FSB to set a new benchmark for an effective desktop platform solution. Supporting up to 4GB of system memory with PC3200/2700/2100 DDR SDRAM, high-resolution graphics via an AGP 8X slot, Serial A T A support, RAID, IEEE 1394, USB 2.0, and 6-channel audio features, the P4P800 Deluxe is your perfect tool to get ahead in the world of power computing! Before you start installing the motherboard, and hardware devices on it, check the items in your package with the list below . If any of the above items is damaged or missing, contact your retailer . ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard ASUS support CD 2 x SA T A cable 80-conductor ribbon cables for UltraDMA/66/100 IDE drives 40-conductor IDE cable Ribbon cable for a 3.5-inch floppy drive I/O shield Bag of extra jumper caps User Guide Quick Reference Card (last page of User Guide) Quick Setup Guide (retail boxes only) Jumpers and Connectors Sticker (retail boxes only) WinDVD Suite software Instant Music keyboard label (retail boxes only)
1-2 Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3 Special features 1.3.1 Product highlights Latest processor technology The P4P800 Deluxe motherboard supports the latest Intel ® Pentium ® 4 / Celeron Processor via a 478-pin surface mount ZIF socket. The Pentium 4 processor with 512KB L2 cache on 0.13 micron processor includes a 800/ 533/400 MHz system bus and the FMB2 power design that allows up to 3.06 GHz core frequencies and Intel ® Prescott CPU when available. See page 2-4 for more information. Dual Channel DDR memory support Employing the dual channel Double Data Rate (DDR) memory architecture, the P4P800 Deluxe motherboard supports up to 4GB of system memory using PC3200/2700/PC2100 DDR DIMMs. The ultra-fast 400MHz memory bus that delivers the required bandwidth for the latest multimedia, internet, and 3D graphics applications. See page 2-10. Serial A T A solution, RAID 0 support The motherboard supports two interfaces compliant to the Serial A T A (SA T A) specification, an evolutionary replacement of the Parallel A T A storage interface. The Serial A T A specification allows for thinner , more flexible cables with lower pin count, reduced voltage requirement, up to 150 MB/s data transfer rate. With the Intel ® ICH5R controller onboard, the motherboard supports RAID 0 configuration using SA T A drives. Ai NET solution The Ai Series supports Gigabit LAN by integrating the 3Com ® 3C940 controller , equipped with a unique net-diagnosing utility - VCT (V irtual Cable T ester). VCT intelligently diagnoses and reports cable faults from a remote location up to 100 meters and helps users improve network quality . See page 5-39. AGP 8X support AGP 8X (AGP 3.0) is the next generation VGA interface specification that enables enhanced graphics performance with high bandwidth speeds up to 2.12 GB/s.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 1-3 Ai Audio solution The SoundMAX-class ADI AD1985 AC â97 audio CODEC supports 6-channel 5.1 surround sound output, stereo microphone input, variable sample rate conversion (SRC), professional quality 103-dB out put with 94-dB SNR, and analog enumeration capability . The SoundMAX 4 XL software features the AudioESP⢠(Audio Enumeration and Sensing Process) that allows intelligent detection of the peripherals plugged into the audio ports and identifies the incompatible devices, if any . See page 5-21 Ai BIOS solution The Ai BIOS is a combination of three ASUS intelligent solutions: CrashFree BIOS2, Q-Fan technology and POST Reporter . Dual Channel UltraA T A 133 RAID support This motherboard incorporates the high-performance VIA ® VT6410 IDE RAID controller , which supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 and JBOD for a balance of hard disk performance and data protection. IEEE 1394 support The IEEE 1394 interface provides high-speed and flexible PC connectivity to a wide range of peripherals and devices compliant to IEEE 1394a standards. The IEEE 1394 interface allows up to 400Mbps transfer rates through simple, low-cost, high-bandwidth asynchronous (real-time) data interfacing between computers, peripherals, and consumer electronic devices such as camcorders, VCRs, printers,TVs, and digital cameras. See page 2-32. USB 2.0 technology The motherboard implements the new Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 specification, extending the connection speed from 12 Mbps on USB 1.1 to a fast 480 Mbps on USB 2.0 - supporting up to 8 USB 2.0 ports. The higher bandwidth of USB 2.0 allows connection of devices such as high resolution video conferencing cameras, next generation scanners and printers, and fast storage units. USB 2.0 is backward compatible with USB 1.1. See page 2-30.
1-4 Chapter 1: Product introduction C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) The C.P .R. feature of the motherboard BIOS allows automatic re-setting to the BIOS default settings in case the system hangs due to overclocking. When the system hangs due to overclocking, C.P .R. eliminates the need to open the system chassis and clear the RTC data. Simply shut down and reboot the system, and BIOS automatically restores the CPU default setting for each parameter . ASUS POST Reporter P4P800 Deluxe offers a new exciting feature called the ASUS POST Reporter to provide friendly voice messages and alerts during the Power- On Self-T ests (POST). Through an added external speaker , you will hear the messages informing you of the system boot status and causes of boot errors, if any . The bundled Winbond V oice Editor software allows you to customize the voice messages, and provides multi-language support. ASUS MyLogo2⢠This new feature present in the P4P800 Deluxe motherboard allows you to personalize and add style to your system with customizable boot logos. See details on pages 4-34 and 5-8. ASUS Multi-language BIOS The multi-language BIOS allows you to select the language of your choice from the available options. The localized BIOS menus allow you to configure easier and faster . Visit the ASUS website for information on the supported languages. ASUS EZ Flash BIOS With the ASUS EZ Flash, you can easily update the system BIOS even before loading the operating system. No need to use a DOS-based utility or boot from a floppy disk. See details on page 4-4.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 1-5 AI Overclocking This feature allows convenient overclocking up to 30% (depending on the installed CPU and DRAM) to enhance system performance while still maintaining system stability . See section â4.4.1 JumperFree Configurationâ to set the BIOS items for overclocking. ASUS Q-Fan technology The ASUS Q-Fan technology smartly adjusts the fan speeds according to the system loading to ensure quiet, cool, and efficient operation. See details on page 4-30. CrashFree BIOS 2 This feature allows you to restore the original BIOS data from the ASUS support CD in case when the BIOS codes and data are corrupted. This protection eliminates the need to buy a replacement ROM chip. See details on page 4-5. ASUS J-Panel This optional device is designed for ASUS motherboards with USB, S/PDIF or Intel Front Panel audio connector for additional front I/O connectors. Instant Music This unique feature allows you to playback audio files even without booting the system to Windowsâ¢. Just press the ASUS Instant Music special function keys and enjoy the music! See details on page 5-14.
1-6 Chapter 1: Product introduction 1.3.2 V alue-added solutions Overclocking ⢠adjustable CPU frequency multiple in BIOS using the ASUS JumperFree⢠solution ⢠C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) ⢠adjustable CPU V CORE , and DDR memory and AGP voltages ⢠Stepless Frequency Selection (SFS) for fine-tuning system bus frequency from 100MHz up to 400MHz at 1MHz increments T emperature, fan, and voltage monitoring The CPU temperature is monitored by the Winbond ASIC to prevent overheating and damage. The system fan rotations per minute (RPM) is monitored for timely failure detection. The system voltage levels are monitored to ensure stable supply of current for critical components. Chassis intrusion detection The motherboard supports chassis intrusion monitoring through the Winbond ASIC. A chassis intrusion event is retained in CMOS for more protection. ASUS update This utility allows you to update the motherboard BIOS through a user- friendly interface. Connect to the Internet then to the ASUS FTP site nearest you to obtain the latest BIOS version for your motherboard.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 1-7 1 .4 Motherboard over vie w Before you install the P4P800 Deluxe motherboard, familiarize yourself with its physical configuration and available features to facilitate the motherboard installation and future upgrades. A sufficient knowledge of the motherboard specifications will also help you avoid mistakes that may damage the board and its components. 1.4.1 Major components The following are the major components of the P4P800 Deluxe motherboard as pointed out in the picture on page 1-7. 1. A TX 12V connector 2. CPU socket 3. North Bridge controller 4. DDR DIMM sockets 5. A TX Power connector 6. Super I/O controller 7. Floppy disk connector 8. IDE connectors 9. AGP slot 10. Serial A T A connectors 1 1. Speech Controller 12. RAID Ultra A T A/133 connector 13. Flash ROM 14. South Bridge controller 15. A T A133 RAID controller 16. Standby Power LED 17. WiFi slot 18. 1394 controller 19. PCI slots 20. Audio CODEC 21. Gigabit LAN controller 22. PS/2 Mouse 23 Parallel port 24. IEEE 1394 port 25. RJ-45 port 26. Line In jack 27. Line Out jack 28. Microphone jack 29. USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4 30. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 31. Serial port 32. S/PDIF output port 33. Keyboard port See page 1-8 for the specifications of each component. Refer to Chapter 2 for detailed information on the components.
1-8 Chapter 1: Product introduction 4 3 21 2 14 15 18 5 8 13 12 19 20 1 7 9 16 1 0 6 11 17 22 33 2 6 2 7 2 8 29 23 25 31 32 24 30
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 1-9 A TX 12V connector . This power connector connects the 4-pin 12V plug from the A TX 12V power supply . CPU socket. A 478-pin surface mount, Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) socket for the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 Processor (and Intelâs future Prescott CPU) support with 800/ 533/400 MHz system bus that allows u p to 6.4 GB/s data transfer rates. North bridge controller . The Intel ® 82865PE Memory Controller Hub (MCH) provides the processor interface with 800/533/400 MHz frequency , system memory interface at 400/333 /266 MHz operation, and 1.5V AGP interface that supports AGP 3 .0 specification including 8X Fast Write protocol. DDR DIMM sockets. These four 184-pin DIMM sockets support up to 4GB system memory using unbuffered non-ECC PC 3200/2700/2100 DDR DIMMs. A TX power connector . This 20-pin connector connects to an A TX 12V power supply . The power supply must have at least 1A on the 5V standby lead ( 5VSB). Super I/O controller . The Winbond 83627THF Low Pin Count (LPC) interface provides the commonly used Super I/O functionality . The chipset supports a high-performance floppy disk controller for a 360K/ 720K/1.44M/2.88M floppy disk drive, a multi-mode parallel port, two serial ports, a GAME port, the mouse and keyboard interface an d the LPC (Low Pin Count) interface. Floppy disk connector . This connector accommodates the provided ribbon cable for the floppy disk drive. One side of the connector is slotted to prevent incorrect insertion of the floppy disk cable. IDE connectors. These dual-channel bus master IDE connectors support Ultra DMA100/66, PIO Modes 3 & 4 IDE devices. Both the primary (blue) and secondary (black) connectors are slotted to prevent incorrect insertion of the IDE ribbon cable. AGP slot. This Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP) slot supports 1.5V AGP8X mode graphics cards for 3D graphical applications. Serial A T A connectors. These two 7-pin connectors accommodate the thin cables for Serial A T A devices. Speech Controller . T he W inbond 83791S W55F10 facilitates the POST speech functionality . 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1.4.2 Core specifications 11 10
1-10 Chapter 1: Product introduction RAID connector . These dual-channel bus master IDE connectors support Ultra DMA/13 3 IDE devices. These connectors are slotted to prevent incorrect insertion of the IDE ribbon cable. Flash ROM. This 4Mb firmware contains the programmable BIOS program. South bridge controller . T he Intel ® ICH5R is a subsystem that integrates various I/O functions including 2-channel A T A100 bus master IDE controller , S A T A RAID controller , up t o eight USB 2.0/1.1 ports, I/O APIC, ACâ97 2.2 interface, and PCI 2.3 interface. A T A133 RAID controller . The V IA ® VT6410 IDE RAID controller provides high performance RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 and JBOD RAID methods. Standby power LED. This LED lights up if there is a standby power on the motherboard. This LED acts as a reminder to turn of f the system power before plugging or unplugging devices. Wi-Fi slot. The Wi-Fi ( Wi reless Fi delity) slot connects a wireless networking module that allows 1 1Mbps transmission (with a fallback to 5.5, 2, and 1 Mbps) in the 2.4 GHz band. Wi-Fi networks use radio technologies known as IEEE 802.1 1b to provide a fast reliable wireless connectivity . IEEE 1394 controller . The V IA ® 6307 controller supports IEEE 1394 functionality with maximum data transfer rates of 400 Mbps. PCI slots. These five 32-bit PCI 2.3 expansion slots support bus master PCI cards like SCSI or LAN cards with 133MB/s maximum throughput. Audio CODEC. The ADI AD1985 is an ACâ97 CODEC that allows 6-channel audio playback. The audio CODEC provides six DAC channels for 5.1 surround sound, S/PDIF output, AUX and Line In stereo inputs, integrated headphone amplifier , greater than 90dB dynamic range with the jack sense and jack enumeration feature. LAN controller . The 3Com ® 3C940 Gigabit Ethernet is a single-chip solution for LAN on Motherboard (LOM) application. The 3C940 provides a 32-bit interface and supports 1000/100/10 Mbps data transfer rates. PS/2 mouse port. This green 6-pin connector is for a PS/2 mouse. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 21
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 1-11 Parallel port. This 25-pin port connects a parallel printer , a scanner , or other devices. IEEE1394 port. This 6-pin IEEE 1394 port provides high-speed connectivity for audio/video devices, storage peripherals, other PCs and/or portable devices. RJ-45 port. This port allows connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) through a network hub. Line In jack. This Line In (light blue) jack connects a tape player or other audio sources. In 6-channel mode, the function of this jack becomes Rear Speaker Out. Line Out jack. This Line Out (lime) jack connects a headphone or a speaker . In 6-channel mode, the function of this jack becomes Front Speaker Out. Microphone jack. This Mic (pink) jack connects a microphone. In 6- channel mode, the function of this jack becomes Bass/Center Speaker Out. 25 26 27 28 32 29 30 31 23 24 33 USB 2.0 ports 3 and 4. These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. USB 2.0 ports 1 and 2 . These two 4-pin Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports are available for connecting USB 2.0 devices. Serial port. This 9-pin COM1 port is for pointing devices or other serial devices. S/PDIF jack. This jack connects to external audio output devices. PS/2 keyboard port. This purple connector is for a PS/2 keyboard.
1-12 Chapter 1: Product introduction
Chapter 2 Hardware information This chapter describes the hardware setup procedures that you have to perform when installing system components. It includes details on the switches, jumpers, and connectors on the motherboard.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard Chapter summar y 2.1 Motherboard installation ............................... 2-1 2.2 Motherboard layout ....................................... 2-2 2.3 Before you proceed ....................................... 2-3 2.4 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ..................... 2-4 2.5 System memory ........................................... 2-10 2.6 Expansion slots ........................................... 2-15 2.7 Jumpers ........................................................ 2-20 2.8 Connectors ................................................... 2-23
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-1 2. 1 Motherboard ins tallation Before you install the motherboard, study the configuration of your chassis to ensure that the motherboard fits into it. The P4P800 Deluxe uses the A TX form factor that measures 12 inches x 9.6 inches. 2.1.1 Placement direction When installing the motherboard, make sure that you place it into the chassis in the correct orientation. The edge with external ports goes to the rear part of the chassis as indicated in the image below . 2.1.2 Screw holes Place nine (9) screws into the holes indicated by circles to secure the motherboard to the chassis. Place this side towards the rear of the chassis Do not overtighten the screws! Doing so may damage the motherboard. Make sure to unplug the power cord before installing or removing the motherboard. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components.
2-2 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.2 Motherboard layout PCI1 P ANEL1 P4P800 ® CR2032 3V Lithium Cell CMOS Power CD1 AUX1 Super I/O 4Mbit Firmware Hub PS/2KBMS T : Mouse B: Ke yboard Below:Mic In Center:Line Out T op:Line In Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP1) CPU_F AN FP_AUDIO Audio Codec USB2.0 T : USB4 B: USB3 T op: RJ-45 GAME1 Socket 478 A TX12V1 CHASSIS1 DDR DIMM_B1 (64 bit,184-pin module) PCI2 PCI3 PCI4 PCI5 IE1394_2 CLRTC1 FLOPPY1 PRI_IDE1 SEC_IDE1 P ARALLEL PORT COM1 SPDIF_O SPDIF_OUT A TX Power Connector DDR DIMM_A1 (64 bit,184-pin module) DDR DIMM_A2 (64 bit,184-pin module) DDR DIMM_B2 (64 bit,184-pin module) KBPWR CHA_F AN1 1394 T op: USB1 USB2 Bottom: Intel ICH5R Intel 82865PE Memory Controller Hub 3Com 3C940 Gbit Speech Controller S ATA 1 COM2 USB_56 USB_78 VIA VT6410 Chipset SB_PWR1 SMB20 PWR_F AN1 S ATA 2 VIA VT6307 Chipset PRI_RAID1 TRPWR1 MODEM1 SEC_RAID1 WIFI USBPW12 USBPW34 USBPW56 USBPW78 24.5cm (9.6in) 30.5cm (12.0in)
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-3 2.3 Before you proceed T ake note of the following precautions before you install motherboard components or change any motherboard settings. P4P800 ® P4P800 Onboard LED SB_PWR1 ON Standby Power OFF Powere d Off 1. Unplug the power cord from the wall socket before touching any component. 2. Use a grounded wrist strap or touch a safely grounded object or to a metal object, such as the power supply case, before handling components to avoid damaging them due to static electricity . 3. Hold components by the edges to avoid touching the ICs on them. 4. Whenever you uninstall any component, place it on a grounded antistatic pad or in the bag that came with the component. 5. Before you install or remove any component, ensure that the A TX power supply is switched off or the power cord is detached from the power supply . Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the motherboard, peripherals, and/or components. When lit, the green LED (SB_PWR1) indicates that the system is ON, in sleep mode, or in soft-off mode, a reminder that you should shut down the system and unplug the power cable before removing or plugging in any motherboard component.
2-4 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.4.1 Overview The motherboard comes with a surface mount 478-pin Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) socket. The socket is designed for the Intel ® Pentium ® 4 Processor in the 478-pin package with 512KB L2 cache on 0.13 micron process. This processor includes the Intel ® NetBurst⢠micro-architecture that features the rapid execution engine, Intel ® Hyper-Threading T echnology , 800/533/400MHz system bus, and execution trace cache. T ogether , these attributes improve system performance by allowing higher core frequencies, faster execution of integer instructions, and data transfer rates of 6.4GB/s, 4.2GB/s and 3.2GB/s. Note in the illustration that the CPU has a gold triangular mark on one corner . This mark indicates the processor Pin 1 that should match a specific corner of the CPU socket. Gold Mark 2.4 Central Pr ocessing Unit (CPU) Notes on Intel ® Hyper-Threading T echnology T o use the Hyper-Threading T echnology on this motherboard: 1. Buy an Intel Pentium 4 CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . Install the CPU. 2. Power up the system and enter BIOS Setup (see Chapter 4). Under the Advanced Menu, make sure that the item CPU Configuration-> Hyper-Threading T echnology is set to Enabled. The item appears only if you installed a CPU that supports Hyper-Threading T echnology . 3. Reboot the computer . 1. This motherboard supports Intel Pentium 4 CPUs with Hyper- Threading T echnology . 2. Hyper-Threading T echnology is supported under Windows XP and Linux 2.4.x (kernel) and later versions only . Under Linux, use the Hyper-Threading compliler to compile the code. If you are using any other operating systems, disable the Hyper-Threading T echonology item in BIOS to ensure system stability and performance. 3. It is recommended that you install WinXP Service Pack 1. 4. Make sure to enable the Hyper-Threading T echnology item in BIOS before installing a supported operating system. 5. For more information on Hyper-Threading T echnology , visit www .intel.com/info/hyperthreading .
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-5 2.4.2 Installing the CPU Follow these steps to install a CPU. 1. Locate the 478-pin ZIF socket on the motherboard. 2. Unlock the socket by pressing the lever sideways, then lift it up to a 90°-100° angle. Socket Lever 90 - 10 0 Incorrect installation of the CPU into the socket may bend the pins and severely damage the CPU! Make sure that the socket lever is lifted up to 90°-100° angle, otherwise the CPU does not fit in completely .
2-6 Chapter 2: Hardware information 3. Position the CPU above the socket such that its marked corner matches the base of the socket lever . 4. Carefully insert the CPU into the socket until it fits in place. 5. When the CPU is in place, push down the socket lever to secure the CPU. The lever clicks on the side tab to indicate that it is locked. Gold Mark The CPU fits only in one correct orientation. DO NOT force the CPU into the socket to prevent bending the pins and damaging the CPU!
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-7 2.4.3 Installing the heatsink and fan The Intel ® Pentium ® 4 Processor requires a specially designed heatsink and fan assembly to ensure optimum thermal condition and performance. Retention Module Base CPU Heatsink Follow these steps to install the CPU heatsink and fan. 1. Place the heatsink on top of the installed CPU, making sure that the heatsink fits properly on the retention module base. When you buy a boxed Intel Pentium 4 Processor , the package includes the heatsink, fan, and retention mechanism. In case you buy a CPU separately , make sure that you use only Intel certified heatsink and fan. The retention module base is already installed on the motherboard upon purchase. Y ou do not have to remove the retention module base when installing the CPU or installing other motherboard components. Y our boxed Intel Pentium 4 Processor package should come with installation instructions for the CPU, heatsink, and the retention mechanism. If the instructions in this section do not match the CPU documentation, follow the latter .
2-8 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. Position the fan with the retention mechanism on top of the heatsink. Align and snap the four hooks of the retention mechanism to the holes on each corner of the module base. Retention Hole Retention Hook Snapped to the Retention Hole Retention Lock Make sure that the fan and retention mechanism assembly perfectly fits the heatsink and module base, otherwise you cannot snap the hooks into the holes. Keep the retention locks lifted upward while fitting the retention mechanism to the module base.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-9 2.4.4 Connecting the CPU fan cable When the fan, heatsink, and the retention mechanism are in place, connect the CPU fan cable to the connector on the motherboard labeled CPU_F AN. 3. Push down the locks on the retention mechanism to secure the heatsink and fan to the module base. CPU Fan Connector (CPU_F AN) When secured, the retention locks should point to opposite directions. Donât forget to connect the CPU fan connector! Hardware monitoring errors may occur if you fail to plug this connector .
2-10 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5 System memor y 2.5.1 Overview The motherboard comes with four Double Data Rate (DDR) Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM) sockets. These sockets support up to 4GB system memory using 184-pin unbuffered non-ECC PC3200/2700/PC2100 DDR DIMMs and allow up to 6.4 GB/s data transfer rate. The following figure illustrates the location of the DDR DIMM sockets. Notes on DDR technology The DDR SDRAM technology evolved from the mainstream PC66, PC100, PC133 memory known as Single Data Rate (SDR) SDRAM. DDR memory however , has the ability to perform two data operations in one clock cycle, thus providing twice the throughput of SDR memory . A DDR DIMM has the same physical dimensions as an SDR DIMM, but it has a 184-pin footprint compared to the 168-pin of the SDR DIMM. Also, a DDR DIMM is single notched while an SDR DIMM is double notched. Therefore, a DDR DIMM is not backward compatible with SDR, and should be installed only in a socket specially designed for DDR DIMMs. P4P800 Deluxe ® P4P800 184-Pin DDR DIMM Sockets 80 Pins 104 Pins DIMM_A 1 DIMM_A 2 DIMM_B 1 DIMM_B 2
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-11 2.5.2 Memory configurations Y ou may install 64MB, 128MB, 256MB, 512MB, and 1GB DDR DIMMs into the DIMM sockets using the memory configurations in this section. Important notes on memory configurations 1. Installing DDR DIMMs other than the recommended configurations may cause memory sizing error or system boot failure. Use any of the recommended configurations in T able 1. 2. In dual-channel configurations, install only identical (the same type and size) DDR DIMM pairs for each channel. 3. Always install DIMMs with the same CAS latency . For optimum compatibility , it is recommended that you obtain memory modules from the same vendor . See list of qualified vendors on page 2-12. 4. Make sure that the memory frequency matches the CPU FSB (Front Side Bus). Refer to T able 2. 5. DIMMs installed into any three sockets will function in single- channel mode. 6. When all four sockets are populated with 1GB DIMMs (total 4GB), the system may detect only 3 GB (a little less than 4GB) due to ICH5R resource allocation. 7. Double-sided DDR DIMMs with X16 (databus width = 16-bit) memory chips are not supported due to chipset limitation. 8. It is recommended to use the blue DIMM slots first.
2-12 Chapter 2: Hardware information T able 1 Recommended memory configurations T able 2 Memory frequency/CPU FSB synchronization * Use only identical DDR DIMM pairs. Sockets Mode DIMM_A1 DIMM_A2 DIMM_B1 DIMM_B2 Single-channel (1) Populated â â â (2) â Populated â â (3) â â Populated â (4) â â â Populated Dual-channel* (1) Populated â Populated â (2) â Populated â Populated (3) Populated Populated Populated Populated CPU FSB DDR DIMM T ype Memory Frequency 800 MHz PC3200/PC2700*/PC2100 400/333*/266 MHz 533 MHz PC2700/PC2100 333/266 MHz 400 MHz PC2100 266 MHz ⢠*When using 800MHz CPU FSB, PC2700 DDR DIMMs may run only at 320MHz (not 333MHz) due to chipset limitation. ⢠The following FSB/DDR ratios are not supported: 400/333, 400/400, 533/400. ⢠FSB/DDR setting 800/333 is recognized as FSB/DDR 800/320. * For dual-channel configuration (3), you may: ⢠install identical DIMMs in all four sockets or ⢠install identical DIMM pair in DIMM_A1 and DIMM_B1 (blue sockets) and identical DIMM pair in DIMM_A2 and DIMM_B2 (black sockets)
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-13 2.5.2.2 DDR Qualified V endor List The following table lists the PC3200 (DDR400) memory modules that have been tested and qualified for use with this motherboard. Obtain DDR DIMMs only from ASUS qualified vendors for better system performance. Make sure to use only the tested and qualified DDR400 DIMMs listed above. Other DDR DIMMs manufactured by other vendors may not be suitable for this motherboard. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) for the latest qualified vendor DDR 400 DDR333 module list. A* - supports one module inserted in any slot in a Single-channel memory configuration. B* - supports one pair of modules inserted into either the blue slots or the black slots as one pair of Dual-channel memory configuration . C* - support for 4 modules inserted into the blue and black slots as two pairs of Dual-channel memory configuration. Size V endor Model Brand SS/DS Component A* B* C* 256MB A DA T A MDGA5F3G315B1EC2 ADA T A SS ADD8608A8A-5B ⢠⢠⢠256MB A DA T A MDOWB5F3G316B1EAE Winbond SS W942508BH-5 ⢠⢠256MB A DA T A MDOSS6F3G31JB1EAE SAMSUNG SS K4H560838D-TCC4 ⢠⢠256MB Apacer 77.10636.465 SAMSUNG SS K4H560838D-TCC4 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Apacer 77.10736.464 SAMSUNG DS K4H560838D-TCC4 ⢠⢠⢠256MB Corsair CMX256-3500C2 XMS3502v1.1 N/A SS N/A ⢠⢠512MB Corsair CMX512-3500C2 XMS3502v1.1 N/A DS N/A ⢠⢠256MB Hynix HYMD232646B8J-D43AA Hynix SS HY5DU56822BT -D43 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Hynix HYMD232646B8J-D43AA Hynix DS HY5DU56822BT -D43 ⢠⢠⢠128MB Infineon HYS64D16301GU-5-B Infineon SS HYB25D256160BT -5B ⢠⢠⢠256MB Infineon HYS64D32300GU-5-B Infineon SS HYB25D256800BT -5B ⢠⢠⢠512MB Infineon HYS64D64320GU-5-B Infineon SS HYB25D256800BT -5B ⢠⢠⢠256MB Kingston KVR400X64C25/256 Winbond SS W942508BH-5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Kingston KVR400X64C25/512 Winbond DS W942508BH-5 ⢠256MB Kingston KHX3500/256 N/A SS N/A ⢠⢠256MB MICRON MT16VDDT3264AG-403B2 MICRON DS MT46V16M8-5TESB ⢠⢠512MB PSC AL6D8A53TK1-5B PSC DS A2S56D30A TP ⢠⢠⢠256MB SAMSUNG M368L3223ETM-CCC SAMSUNG SS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠512MB SAMSUNG M368L6423ETM-CCC SAMSUNG DS K4H560838E-TCCC ⢠⢠⢠256MB T ranscend TS32MLD64V4F3 SAMSUNG SS K4H560838D-TCC4 ⢠⢠256MB T ranscend TS32MLD64V4F3 Mosel SS V58C2256804SA T5 ⢠⢠512MB T ranscend TS64MLD64V4F3 SAMSUNG DS K4H560838D-TCC4 ⢠⢠256MB T ranscend TS64MLD64V4F3 Mosel DS V58C2256804SA T5 ⢠⢠⢠256MB T winMOS M2G9108AF A TT9FD81AA4T T winMOS SS TMD7608F8E50D ⢠⢠⢠512MB T winMOS M2G9J16AGA TT9F081AA4T T winMOS DS TMD7608F8E50D ⢠⢠256MB T winMOS M2S9108AF APS9F0811A-T PSC SS A2S56D30A TP ⢠⢠⢠256MB Winbond W9425GCDB-5 Winbond SS W942508CH-5 ⢠⢠⢠512MB Winbond W9451GCDB-5 Winbond DS W942508CH-5 ⢠⢠â¢
2-14 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.5.3 Installing a DIMM Follow these steps to install a DIMM. 1. Locate the DIMM sockets in the motherboard. 2.5.4 Removing a DIMM Follow these steps to remove a DIMM. 4. Firmly insert the DIMM into the socket until the retaining clips snap back in place and the DIMM is properly seated. 1. Simultaneously press the retaining clips outward to unlock the DIMM. 2. Remove the DIMM from the socket. 2. Unlock a DIMM socket by pressing the retaining clips outward. 3. Align a DIMM on the socket such that the notch on the DIMM matches the break on the socket. P4P800 ® P4P800 184-Pin DDR DIMM Sockets 80 Pins 104 Pins DIMM_A 1 DIMM_A 2 DIMM_B 1 DIMM_B 2 Make sure to unplug the power supply before adding or removing DIMMs or other system components. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to both the motherboard and the components. A DDR DIMM is keyed with a notch so that it fits in only one direction. DO NOT force a DIMM into a socket to avoid damaging the DIMM. Support the DIMM lightly with your fingers when pressing the retaining clips. The DIMM might get damaged when it flips out with extra force. Unlocked Retaining Clip DDR DIMM NOTCH Locked Retaining Clip
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-15 2.6 Expansion slots In the future, you may need to install expansion cards. The motherboard has five PCI slots and one Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP) slot. The following sub-sections describe the slots and the expansion cards that they support. 2.6.1 Installing an expansion card Follow these steps to install an expansion card. 1. Before installing the expansion card, read the documentation that came with it and make the necessary hardware settings for the card. 2. Remove the system unit cover (if your motherboard is already installed in a chassis). 3. Remove the bracket opposite the slot that you intend to use. Keep the screw for later use. 4. Align the card connector with the slot and press firmly until the card is completely seated on the slot. 5. Secure the card to the chassis with the screw you removed earlier . 6. Replace the system cover . 2.6.2 Configuring an expansion card After installing the expansion card, configure the card by adjusting the software settings. 1. T urn on the system and change the necessary BIOS settings, if any . See Chapter 4 for information on BIOS setup. 2. Assign an IRQ to the card. Refer to the tables on the next page. 3. Install the software drivers for the expansion card. Make sure to unplug the power cord before adding or removing expansion cards. Failure to do so may cause you physical injury and damage motherboard components.
2-16 Chapter 2: Hardware information Standard Interrupt Assignments IRQ Priority Standard Function 0 1 System T imer 1 2 Keyboard Controller 2 N/A Programmable Interrupt 3* 1 1 Communications Port (COM2) 4* 12 Communications Port (COM1) 5* 13 Sound Card (sometimes LPT2) 6 14 Floppy Disk Controller 7* 15 Printer Port (LPT1) 8 3 System CMOS/Real T ime Clock 9* 4 ACPI Mode when used 10* 5 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering 1 1* 6 IRQ Holder for PCI Steering 12* 7 PS/2 Compatible Mouse Port 13 8 Numeric Data Processor 14* 9 Primary IDE Channel 15* 10 Secondary IDE Channel * These IRQs are usually available for ISA or PCI devices. IRQ assignments for this motherboard ABCDE FG H PCI slot 1 â â â â â shared â â PCI slot 2 â â â â â â shared â PCI slot 3 â â â â â â â shared PCI slot 4 â â â â shared â â â PCI slot 5 â â â â â shared â â AGP slot used â â â â â â â Onboard USB 1.1/2.0 controller â â â â shared shared shared shared Onboard LAN â â â â â â shared â Onboard RAID â â â â â â â shared Onboard 1394 â â â â shared â â â Onboard Audio â â used â â â â â When using PCI cards on shared slots, ensure that the drivers support âShare IRQâ or that the cards do not need IRQ assignments. Otherwise, conflicts will arise between the two PCI groups, making the system unstable and the card inoperable.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-17 2.6.3 PCI slots There are five 32-bit PCI slots on this motherboard. The slots support PCI cards such as a LAN card, SCSI card, USB card, and other cards that comply with PCI specifications. The following figure shows a LAN card installed on a PCI slot. ⢠The PCI 5 slot and the WiFi slot can not be used at the same time. ⢠When installing long PCI cards, it is recommended that to install in PCI slots 2, 4 or 5. Long PCI cards installed in PCI slot 1 may interfere with the SA T A connectors. ⢠When installing 64-bit PCI cards, it is recommended not to install in PCI slot 3. 64-bit PCI cards installed in PCI slot 3 may interfere with the USB connectors.
2-18 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.6.4 AGP slot This motherboard has an Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP) slot that only supports 1.5V AGP cards. When you buy an AGP card, make sure that you ask for one with 1.5V specification. Note the notches on the card golden fingers to ensure that they fit the AGP slot on your motherboard. P4P800 ® P4P800 Accelerated Graphics Port (AGP) Keyed for 1.5v If installing the A T i 9500 or 9700 Pro Series VGA cards, use only the card version PN xxx-xxxxx-30 or later , for optimum performance and overclocking stability . Install only 1.5V AGP cards on this motherboard! 3.3V AGP cards are not supported in this motherboard.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-19 2.6.5 W i-Fi slot The Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) slot will support the ASUS Wi-Fi module when available. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) for product updates. The Wi-Fi slot conforms to the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 802.1 1b standard for wireless devices operating in the 2.4 GHz frequency band. This standard includes provisions for three radio technologies: direct sequence spread spectrum, frequency hopping spread spectrum, and infrared. Devices that comply with the 802.1 1b standard operate at data rates of up to 1 1 Mbps for direct sequence spread spectrum. The IEEE 802.1 1b specification allocates the 2.4 GHz frequency band into 14 overlapping operating channels. Each Channel corresponds to a different set of frequencies. If operating multiple 802.1 1b wireless PCI cards in the same vicinity , the distance between the center frequencies must be at least 25 MHz to avoid interference. The channels available to an 802.1 1b wireless PCI card will vary from country to country . In the United States, the 802.1 1b standard allocates 1 1 operating channels for direct sequence devices. Channels 1, 6, and 1 1 are independent and do not overlap with each other . P4P800 ® P4P800 WIRELESS Connectors WIF I The PCI 5 slot and the Wi-Fi slot may not be used at the same time.
2-20 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2.7 Jumpers 1. Clear RTC RAM (CLRTC1) This jumper allows you to clear the Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM in CMOS. Y ou can clear the CMOS memory of date, time, and system setup parameters by erasing the CMOS RTC RAM data. The RAM data in CMOS, that include system setup information such as system passwords, is powered by the onboard button cell battery . T o erase the R TC RAM: 1. T urn OFF the computer and unplug the power cord. 2. Remove the onboard battery . 3. Move the jumper cap from pins 1-2 (default) to pins 2-3. Keep the cap on pins 2-3 for about 5~10 seconds, then move the cap back to pins 1-2. 4. Replace the battery . 5. Plug the power cord and turn ON the computer . 6. Hold down the <Del> key during the boot process and enter BIOS setup to re-enter data. P4P800 ® P4P800 Clear RTC RAM CLRTC1 Normal Clear CMOS (Default) 12 23 Except when clearing the RTC RAM, never remove the cap on CLRTC1 jumper default position. Removing the cap will cause system boot failure! Y ou do not need to clear the RTC when the system hangs due to overclocking. For system failure due to overclocking, use the C.P .R. (CPU Parameter Recall) feature. Shut down and reboot the system so BIOS can automatically reset parameter settings to default values.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-21 2. SMB 2.0 (6-1 pin SMB20) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the SM bus support for PCI slots. Set this jumper to pins 1-2 to enable the SM bus support. The jumpers are disable as default setting. 3. Keyboard power (3-pin KBPWR) This jumper allows you to enable or disable the keyboard wake-up feature. Set this jumper to pins 2-3 ( 5VSB) if you wish to wake up the computer when you press a key on the keyboard (the default value is [Disabled]). This feature requires an A TX power supply that can supply at least 1A on the 5VSB lead and a corresponding setting in the BIOS. (see section 4.5.1 Power Up Control) P4P800 ® P4P800 SMB2.0 Support SMB20 Disable Enable (Defaul t) 3 2 2 1 P4P800 ® P4P800 Keyboard Power Setting (Default) 5V 5VSB KBPWR 23 12
2-22 Chapter 2: Hardware information 4. USB device wake-up (3-pin USBPW12, USBPW34, USBPW56, USBPW78) Set these jumpers to 5V to wake up the computer from S1 sleep mode (CPU stopped, DRAM refreshed, system running in low power mode) using the connected USB devices. Set to 5VSB to wake up from S3 and S4 sleep modes (no power to CPU, DRAM in slow refresh, power supply in reduced power mode). The USBPW12 and USBPW34 jumpers are for the rear USB ports. The USBPW56 and USBPW78 jumpers are for the internal USB header that you can connect to the front USB ports. P4P800 ® P4P800 USB Device W ake Up 3 2 2 1 5V (Default) 5VSB USBPW12 USBPW34 3 2 2 1 5V (Default) 5VSB USBPW56 USBPW78 1. The USB device wake-up feature requires a power supply that can provide 500mA on the 5VSB lead for each USB port. Otherwise, the system would not power up. 2. The total current consumed must NOT exceed the power supply capability ( 5VSB) whether under normal condition or in sleep mode.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-23 2.8 Connectors This section describes and illustrates the internal connectors on the motherboard. 1. Floppy disk drive connector (34-1 pin FLOPPY1) This connector supports the provided floppy drive ribbon cable. After connecting one end to the motherboard, connect the other end to the floppy drive. (Pin 5 is removed to prevent incorrect insertion when using ribbon cables with pin 5 plug). P4P800 ® NOTE: Orient the red markings o n the floppy ribbon cable to PIN 1. P4P800 Floppy Disk Drive Connector PIN 1 FLOPPY1 Always connect ribbon cables with the colored to Pin 1 on the connectors. Pin 1 is usually on the side closest to the power connector on hard drives and CD-ROM drives, but may be on the opposite side on floppy disk drives.
2-24 Chapter 2: Hardware information 2. IDE connectors (40-1 pin PRI_IDE1, SEC_IDE1) This connector supports the provided UltraDMA100/66 IDE hard disk ribbon cable. Connect the cableâ s blue connector to the primary (recommended) or secondary IDE connector , then connect the gray connector to the UltraDMA100/66 slave device (hard disk drive) and the black connector to the UltraDMA100/66 master device. It is recommended that you connect non-UltraDMA100/66 devices to the secondary IDE connector . If you install two hard disks, you must configure the second drive as a slave device by setting its jumper accordingly . Refer to the hard disk documentation for the jumper settings. BIOS supports specific device bootup. If you have more than two UltraDMA100/66 devices, purchase another UltraDMA100/66 cable. Y ou may configure two hard disks to be both master devices with two ribbon cables â one for the primary IDE connector and another for the secondary IDE connector . P4P800 ® P4P800 IDE Connectors NOTE: Orient the red marking s (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. SEC_IDE1 PRI_IDE1 PIN 1 1. Pin 20 on each IDE connector is removed to match the covered hole on the UltraDMA cable connector . This prevents incorrect orientation when you connect the cables. 2. The hole near the blue connector on the UltraDMA100/66 cable is intentional. For UltraDMA100/66 IDE devices, use an 80-conductor IDE cable. The UltraDMA/66 cable included in the motherboard package also supports UltraDMA100. Important notes when using legacy OS ⢠Refer to page 2-26 on how to configure P-A T A and S-A T A devices if you installed a legacy operating system (e.g. MS-DOS, Windows 98/ME/NT4.0). ⢠In legacy OS, manually set DMA mode in Device Manager under System Properties, if your hard disk supports UDMA mode.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-25 3. Serial A T A connectors (7-pin SA T A1, SA T A2) These next generation connectors support the thin Serial A T A cables for primary internal storage devices. The current Serial A T A interface allows up to 150 MB/s data transfer rate, faster than the standard parallel A T A with 133 MB/s (Ultra A T A/133). P4P800 ® P4P800 SA T A Connectors S ATA 2 GND RSA T A_TXP2 RSA T A_TXN2 GND RSA T A_RXP2 RSA T A_RXN2 GND S ATA 1 GND RSA T A_TXP1 RSA T A_TXN1 GND RSA T A_RXP1 RSA T A_RXN1 GND Important notes on Serial A T A solution: ⢠In legacy operating system (W in 98, WinME, WinNT , DOS) environment, using SA T A will disable one of the IDE channels from ICH5R south bridge chipset. See BIOS section for correct setting. ⢠The Serial A T A cable is smaller and more flexible allowing easier routing inside the chassis. The lower pin count of the Serial A T A cable eliminates the problem caused by the wide, flat ribbon cables of the Parallel A T A interface. ⢠The Serial A T A RAID driver is available for Windows ® XP⢠only . ⢠Only RAID 0 is supported. ⢠Hot plug support for Serial A T A drive and connections are not available in this motherboard. ⢠Install Windows ® XP⢠Service Pack 1 when using Serial A T A.
2-26 Chapter 2: Hardware information Parallel A T A and Serial A T A device configurations Following are the Parallel A T A and Serial A T A device configurations supported by Intel ICH5 specifications. Native operating systems (OS) are Windows 2000/XP . ICH5R supports a maximum of six (6) devices using these OS. Legacy OS are MS-DOS, Windows 98/Me/NT4.0. ICH5R supports a maximum of four (4) devices using these OS. Required IDE Configuration settings in BIOS Refer to the following table for the appropriate BIOS settings of the above P-A T A and S-A T A device configurations. See section â4.3.6 IDE Configurationâ for details on the related BIOS items. Windows Windows 98/Me/NT4.0 BIOS item 2000/XP A B C Onboard IDE Operate Mode Enhanced Mode Compatible Mode Compatible Mode Compatible Mode Enhanced Mode Support On S- A T A â â â IDE Port Settings â Primary P-A T A S-A T A Sec. P-A T A S-A T A P-A T A Ports Only Legend: Supported â Disabled P-A T A S-A T A Operating System Primary Secondary Port 0 Port 1 (2 devices) (2 devices) (1 device) (1 device) 1. Windows 2000/XP 2. Windows 98/Me/NT4.0 Configuration A â Configuration B â Configuration C ââ
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-27 4. RAID A T A/133/100/66/33 connectors (40-1 pin PRI_RAID1, SEC_RAID1) These connectors support either RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 or JBOD configuration through the onboard VIA ® 6410 controller . Y ou can use the RAID feature to set up a disk array configuration and to support additional IDE devices. P4P800 ® P4P800 RAID Connectors NOTE: Orient the red markings (usually zigzag) on the IDE ribbon cable to PIN 1. PRI_RAID1 PIN 1 PIN 1 SEC_RAID1 5. SMBus connector (6-1 pin SMB1) This connector allows you to connect SMBus (System Management Bus) devices. Devices communicate with an SMBus host and/or other SMBus devices using the SMBus interface. P4P800 ® P4P800 SMBus Connector SMB1 1 SMBCLK Ground SMBDA T A 3V FLOA TING Important notes on the RAID feature: ⢠By default, the drive that you connect to the PRI_RAID connector follow the A T A133/100/66/33 protocol as an independent drive, not as a disk array . ⢠The RAID/SA T A controller chipset does not support A T API devices such as CD-ROMs, DVD-ROMs, etc. ⢠RAID feature only supported in Microsoft Operating Systems.
2-28 Chapter 2: Hardware information 6. Chassis intrusion connector (4-1 pin CHASSIS1) This lead is for a chassis designed with intrusion detection feature. This requires an external detection mechanism such as a chassis intrusion sensor or microswitch. When you remove any chassis component, the sensor triggers and sends a high-level signal to this lead to record a chassis intrusion event. By default, the pins labeled âChassis Signalâ and âGroundâ are shorted with a jumper cap. If you wish to use the chassis intrusion detection feature, remove the jumper cap from the pins. 7. CPU, Chassis, and Power Fan Connectors (3-pin CPU_F AN1, PWR_F AN1, CHA_F AN1) The fan connectors support cooling fans of 350mA~740mA (8.88W max.) or a total of 1A~2.22A (26.64W max.) at 12V . Connect the fan cables to the fan connectors on the motherboard, making sure that the black wire of each cable matches the ground pin of the connector . P4P800 ® P4P800 Chassis Alarm Lead CHASSIS 1 5VSB_MB Chassis Signal GND (Default ) P4P800 ® P4P800 12-V olt Fan Connectors CPU_F AN1 CHA_F AN1 GND Rotatio n 12V PWR_F AN1 GND Rotation 12V GND Rotation 12V Do not forget to connect the fan cables to the fan connectors. Lack of sufficient air flow within the system may damage the motherboard components. These are not jumpers! DO NOT place jumper caps on the fan connectors!
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-29 8. A TX power connectors (20-pin A TXPWR, 4-pin A TX12V) These connectors connect to an A TX 12V power supply . The plugs from the power supply are designed to fit these connectors in only one orientation. Find the proper orientation and push down firmly until the connectors completely fit. In addition to the 20-pin A TXPWR1 connector , this motherboard requires that you connect the 4-pin A TX 12V power plug to provide suf ficient power to the CPU. P4P800 ® P4P800 A TX Power Connector A TXPWR1 A TX12V1 3.3VDC -12.0VDC COM PS_ON# COM COM COM -5.0VDC 5.0VDC 5.0VDC PWR_OK 12.0VDC 3.3VDC 3.3VDC COM 5.0VDC COM 5.0VDC COM 5VSB 12V DC GND 12V DC GND 1. Do not forget to connect the 4-pin A TX 12V power plug. Otherwise, the system does not boot up. 2. Make sure that your A TX 12V power supply can provide 8A on the 12V lead and at least 1A on the 5-volt standby lead ( 5VSB). The minimum recommended wattage is 230W , or 300W for a fully configured system. The system may become unstable or may not boot up if the power is inadequate.
2-30 Chapter 2: Hardware information 9. USB headers (10-1 pin USB_56, USB_78) If the USB ports on the rear panel are inadequate, a USB header is available for additional USB ports. The USB header complies with USB 2.0 specification that supports up to 480 Mbps connection speed. This speed advantage over the conventional 12 Mbps on USB 1.1 allows faster Internet connection, interactive gaming, and simultaneous running of high-speed peripherals. P4P800 ® P4P800 USB 2.0 Header USB_56 USB 5V USB_P6- USB_P6 GND NC USB 5V USB_P5- USB_P5 GND 1 USB_78 USB 5V USB_P8- USB_P8 GND NC USB 5V USB_P7- USB_P7 GND 1 Y ou must install the driver before you can use the USB 2.0 capability . NEVER connect a 1394 cable to the USB_56 or USB_78 connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! The USB port is an optional item and not included in this motherboard package. 10. Power supply thermal connector (2-pin TRPWR1) If your power supply has a thermal monitoring feature, connect its thermal sensor cable to this connector . P4P800 ® P4P800 Power Supply Thermal Connector TRPWR 1 Ground TRPWR
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-31 12. Internal audio connectors (4-pin CD1, AUX1, MODEM) These connectors allow you to receive stereo audio input from sound sources such as a CD-ROM, TV tuner , or MPEG card. The MODEM connector allows the onboard audio to interface with a voice modem card with a similar connector . It also allows the sharing of mono_in (such as a phone) and a mono_out (such as a speaker) between the audio and a voice modem card. 1 1. GAME/MIDI connector (16-1 pin GAME1) This connector supports an optional GAME/MIDI module. If a GAME/ MIDI module is available, connect the GAME/MIDI cable to this connector . The GAME/MIDI port on the module connects a joystick or a game pad for playing games, and MIDI devices for playing or editing audio files. P4P800 ® P4P800 Game Connector GAME1 5V 5V J2B1 J2CX MIDI_OUT J2CY J2B2 MIDI_IN J1B1 J1CX GND GND J1CY J1B2 5V P4P800 ® P4P800 Internal Audio Connectors CD1(Black) AUX1(White) Right Audio Channe l Left Audio Channel Ground Ground MODEM Modem-In Ground Modem-Out Ground The GAME port module is an optional item not included in this motherboard package.
2-32 Chapter 2: Hardware information 14. Front panel audio connector (10-1 pin FP_AUDIO) This is an interface for the Intel front panel audio cable that allow convenient connection and control of audio devices. By default, the pins labeled LINE_OUT_R/BLINE_OUT_R and the pins LINE_OUT_L/BLINE_OUT_L are shorted with jumper caps. Remove the caps only when you are connecting the front panel audio cable. 13. IEEE 1394 connectors (10-1 pin IEEE1394_2(Orange)) These connectors are for IEEE 1394 modules. Attach the 10-1 pin cable plugs to these connectors. Y ou may also connect a 1394- compliant internal hard disk to these connectors. P4P800 ® P4P800 IEEE-1394 Connector IE1394_2 1 TP A0- GND TPB0- 12V GND TP A0 GND TPB0 12V P4P800 ® P4P800 Front Panel Audio Connector FP_AUDIO BLINE_OUT_L MIC2 Line out_R Line out_L BLINE_OUT_R NC MICPWR 5V A AGND NEVER connect a USB cable to any of the IEEE 1394 (orange) connectors. Doing so will damage the motherboard! The IEEE 1394 connector module is not included in this motherboard package.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 2-33 15. Digital Audio connector (6-1 pin SPDIF_OUT) This connector is for the S/PDIF audio module to allow digital sound output. Connect one end of the S/PDIF audio cable to this connector and the other end to the S/PDIF module. 16. Serial Port 2 connector (10-1 pin COM2) This connector accomodates a second serial port using an optional serial port bracket. Connect the bracket cable to this connector then install the bracket into a slot opening at the back of the system chassis. P4P800 ® P4P800 Digital Audio Connector 5V SPDIFOUT GND SPDIF_OUT P4P800 ® P4P800 Serial COM2 Bracket PIN 1 COM2 The S/PDIF module is not included in this motherboard package. The COM2 module is not included in this motherboard package.
2-34 Chapter 2: Hardware information 17. System panel connector (20-pin P ANEL) This connector accommodates several system front panel functions. ⢠System Power LED Lead (3-1 pin PLED) This 3-1 pin connector connects to the system power LED. The LED lights up when you turn on the system power , and blinks when the system is in sleep mode. ⢠System W arning Speaker Lead (4-pin SPKR) This 4-pin connector connects to the case-mounted speaker and allows you to hear system beeps and warnings. ⢠System Management Interrupt Lead (2-pin SMI) This 2-pin connector allows you to manually place the system into a suspend mode, or âgreenâ mode, where system activity is instantly decreased to save power and to expand the life of certain system components. Attach the case-mounted suspend switch to this 2-pin connector . ⢠A TX Power Switch / Soft-Off Switch Lead (2-pin PWRBTN) This connector connects a switch that controls the system power . Pressing the power switch turns the system between ON and SLEEP , or ON and SOFT OFF , depending on the BIOS or OS settings. Pressing the power switch while in the ON mode for more than 4 seconds turns the system OFF . ⢠Reset Switch Lead (2-pin RESET) This 2-pin connector connects to the case-mounted reset switch for rebooting the system without turning of f the system power . ⢠Hard disk activity LED (2-pin IDE_LED) This connector supplies power to the hard disk activity LED. Any read or write activity of an IDE device cause this LED to light up. P4P800 ® P4P800 System Panel Connectors * Requires an A TX power supply . PLED- Ground PWR 5V Speaker Speaker Connector Power LED Ground Reset SW SMI Lead ExtSMI# Ground Reset Ground Ground A TX Power Switch* PLED IDE_LED- IDE_LED IDE_LED
Chapter 3 Powering up This chapter describes the power up sequence and gives information on the BIOS beep codes.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard Chapter summar y 3.1 Starting up for the first time .......................... 3-1 3.2 V ocal POST Messages ................................... 3-2 3.3 Powering off the computer ........................... 3-4
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 3-1 3. 1 St ar ting up for the fir st time 1. After making all the connections, replace the system case cover . 2. Be sure that all switches are off. 3. Connect the power cord to the power connector at the back of the system chassis. 4. Connect the power cord to a power outlet that is equipped with a surge protector . 5. T urn on the devices in the following order: a. Monitor b. External SCSI devices (starting with the last device on the chain) c. System power 6. After applying power , the power LED on the system front panel case lights up. For A TX power supplies, the system LED lights up when you press the A TX power switch. If your monitor complies with âgreenâ standards or if it has a âpower standbyâ feature, the monitor LED may light up or switch between orange and green after the system LED turns on. The system then runs the power-on tests. While the tests are running, the BIOS beeps or additional messages appear on the screen. If you do not see anything within 30 seconds from the time you turned on the power , the system may have failed a power-on test. Check the jumper settings and connections or call your retailer for assistance. 7. At power on, hold down <Delete> to enter BIOS Setup. Follow the instructions in Chapter 4.
3-2 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.2 V ocal POST Messages This motherboard includes the Winbond speech controller to support a special feature called the ASUS POST Reporterâ¢. This feature gives you vocal POST messages and alerts to inform you of system events and boot status. In case of a boot failure, you will hear the specific cause of the problem. These POST messages are customizable using the Winbond V oice Editor software that came with your package. Y ou can record your own messages to replace the default messages. Following is a list of the default POST messages and their corresponding actions, if any . POST Message Action No CPU installed ⢠Install an Intel Pentium 4 Processor into the CPU socket. System failed CPU test ⢠Check the CPU if properly installed. ⢠Call ASUS technical support for assistance. See the âASUS contact informationâ on page x. System failed memory test ⢠Install 184-pin unbuffered PC3200/2700/2100 DIMMs into the DIMM sockets. ⢠Check if the DIMMs on the DIMM sockets are properly installed. ⢠Make sure that your DIMMs are not defective. ⢠Refer to section â2.5 System memoryâ for instruction on installing a DIMM. System failed VGA test ⢠Install a PCI VGA card into one of the PCI slots, or a 1.5V AGP card into the AGP slot. ⢠Make sure that your VGA/AGP card is not defective. System failed due to CPU ⢠Check your CPU settings in BIOS over-clocking and make sure you only set to the recommended settings. See section â4.4 Advanced menu.â
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 3-3 POST Message Action No keyboard detected ⢠Check your keyboard if properly connected to the purple PS/2 connector on the rear panel. ⢠See section â1.4.1 Major componentsâ for the location of the connector . No floppy disk detected ⢠Make sure you have connected a floppy disk to the floppy disk connector on the motherboard. No IDE hard disk detected ⢠Make sure you have connected an IDE hard disk drive to the one of the IDE connectors on the motherboard. CPU temperature too high ⢠Check CPU fan if working properly . CPU fan failed ⢠Check the CPU fan and make sure it turns on after you applied power to the system. ⢠Make sure that your CPU fan supports the fan speed detection function. CPU voltage out of range ⢠Check your power supply and make sure it is not defective. ⢠Call ASUS technical support for assistance. See the âASUS contact informationâ on page x. System completed Power-On Self T est ⢠No action required Computer now booting from operating ⢠No action required system Y ou may disable the ASUS POST Reporter⢠in the BIOS setup. See section â4.4 Speech Configurationâ.
3-4 Chapter 3: Powering up 3.3 Powering of f the com puter Using the OS shut down function If you use Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP , click the Start button, click Shut Down , then the OK button to shut down the computer . The power supply should turn off after Windows shuts down. Using the dual function power switch While the system is ON, pressing the power switch for less than 4 seconds puts the system to sleep mode or to soft-off mode, depending on the BIOS setting. Pressing the power switch for more than 4 seconds lets the system enter the soft-off mode regardless of the BIOS setting. See section â4.5 Power Menuâ in Chapter 4.
Chapter 4 BIOS setup This chapter gives information about the ASUS P4P800 Deluxe Basic Input/Output System (BIOS).This chapter includes updating the BIOS using the AFUDOS.EXE utility that is bundled with the support CD.
ASUS P4SDX Deluxe motherboard Chapter summar y 4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS .............. 4-1 4.2 BIOS Setup program ...................................... 4-7 4.3 Main Menu .................................................... 4-10 4.4 Advanced Menu ........................................... 4-15 4.5 Power Menu .................................................. 4-27 4.6 Boot Menu .................................................... 4-32 4.7 Exit Menu ...................................................... 4-37
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-1 4. 1 Managing and updating your BIOS 4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk 1. Do either one of the following to create a bootable floppy disk. DOS environment Insert a 1.44 MB floppy disk into the drive. At the DOS prompt, type: format A:/S , then press the <Enter> key Windows environment a. From your Windows desktop, click on Start , point to Settings , then click on Control Panel . b. Double-click on Add/Remove Programs icon from the Control Panel window . c. Click on the Startup Disk tab, then on Create Disk... button. d. Insert a 1.44 MB floppy disk when prompted. Follow the suceeding screen instructions to complete the process. 2. Copy the original (or the latest) motherboard BIOS to the bootable floppy disk. 4.1.2 Using AFUDOS to update the BIOS Update the BIOS using the AFUDOS.EXE utility in DOS environment. 1. V isit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for your motherboard. Save the BIOS file to a bootable floppy disk. 2. Copy the AFUDOS.EXE utility from the support CD to the bootable floppy disk that contains the BIOS file. 3. Boot the system from the floppy disk. W rite down the BIOS file name to a piece of paper . Y ou need to type the exact BIOS file name at the prompt. ⢠The original BIOS file for this motherboard is in the root directory of the support CD filenamed âP4P800.ROMâ. ⢠Copy the original BIOS to a bootable floppy disk in case you need to restore the BIOS in the future.
4-2 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup 4. At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos / i <filename> where âfilenameâ means the latest (or original) BIOS file that you copied to the bootable floppy disk. The screen displays the status of the update process. A:\>afudos /iP4P800.rom AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.10 Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading file ..... done Erasing flash .... done Writing flash .... 0x0008CC00 (9%) When the BIOS update process is complete, the utility returns to the DOS prompt. A:\>afudos /iP4P800.rom AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.10 Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading file ..... done Erasing flash .... done Writing flash .... 0x0008CC00 (9%) Verifying flash .. done A:\> 5. Reboot the system from the hard disk. The BIOS information on the screen is for reference only . What you see on your screen may not be exactly the same as shown. DO NOT shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so may cause system boot failure!
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-3 1. At the DOS prompt, type the command line: afudos /o <filename> where âfilenameâ can be any user provided filename of not more than eight (8) alpha-numeric characters for the main filename and three (3) alpha-numeric characters for the extension name. Press the Enter key . 2. The utility will copy the current system BIOS by default to the floppy disk. Make sure that the floppy disk is not write-protected and have enough space (at least 600KB) to store the file. The BIOS information on the screen is for reference only . What you see on your screen may not be exactly the same as shown. 4.1.3 Using AFUDOS to copy BIOS from PC The AFUDOS.EXE utility can also be used to copy the current system BIOS settings to a floppy or hard disk. The copy can be used as a backup in case the system BIOS fails or gets corrupted. A:\>afudos /oMYBIOS03.rom AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.10 Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading flash ..... done A:\> When the BIOS copy process is complete, the utility returns to the DOS prompt. Main filename Extension name A:\>afudos /oMYBIOS03.rom AMI Firmware Update Utility - Version 1.10 Copyright (C) 2002 American Megatrends, Inc. All rights reserved. Reading flash ..... 0x0008CC00 (9%)
4-4 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup 4.1.4 Using ASUS EZ Flash to update the BIOS The ASUS EZ Flash feature allows you to easily update the BIOS without having to go through the long process of booting from a diskette and using a DOS-based utility . The EZ Flash is built-in the BIOS firmware so it is accessible by simply pressing <Alt> <F2> during the Power-On Self T ests (POST). T o update the BIOS using ASUS EZ Flash: 1. Visit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file for your motherboard and rename the downloaded file as P4P800.ROM . Save the BIOS file to a floppy disk. 2. Reboot the system. 3. T o launch EZ Flash, press <Alt> <F2> during POST to display the following. 4. Insert the floppy disk that contains the BIOS file. If all the necessary files are found in the floppy disk, EZ Flash performs the BIOS update process and automatically reboots the system when done. User recovery requested. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âP4P800.româ. Completed. Start flashing... Flashed successfully. Rebooting. User recovery requested. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... ⢠If there is no floppy disk found in the drive, the error message â Floppy not found! â appears. ⢠If the correct BIOS file is not found in the floppy disk, the error message â P4P800.ROM not found!â is displayed. Make sure to rename the downloaded BIOS file as â P4P800.ROM â. DO NOT shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so may cause system boot failure!
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-5 4.1.5 Recovering the BIOS with CrashFree BIOS 2 The CrashFree BIOS 2 auto recovery tool allows you to restore BIOS from the motherboard support CD, or from a floppy disk that contains the BIOS file, in case the current BIOS on the motherboard fails or gets corrupted. T o recover the BIOS from a floppy disk: 1. Boot the system. 2. When a corrupted BIOS is detected, the following screen message appears. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... 3. Insert a floppy disk that contains the original or the latest BIOS file for this motherboard. If all the necessary files are found in the floppy disk, the BIOS update process continues. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy found! Reading file âP4P800.româ. Completed. Start flashing... 4. When the BIOS update process is complete, reboot the system. 1. Prepare the support CD that came with the motherboard or a floppy disk that contains the motherboard BIOS before proceeding with the BIOS update process. 2. If you have saved a copy of the original motherboard BIOS to a bootable floppy disk, you may also use this disk to restore the BIOS. See section â4.1.1 Creating a bootable floppy disk.â DO NOT shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so may cause system boot failure! Make sure that the BIOS file in the floppy disk is renamed as â P4P800.ROM â.
4-6 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup T o recover the BIOS from the support CD: 1. Boot the system. 2. When a corrupted BIOS is detected, the following screen message appears. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... 3. Place the support CD in the CD-ROM. The support CD contains the original BIOS for this motherboard. 4. When the BIOS update process is complete, reboot the system. Bad BIOS checksum. Starting BIOS recovery... Checking for floppy... Floppy not found! Checking for CD-ROM... CD-ROM found. Reading file âP4P800.româ. Completed. Start flashing... The recovered BIOS may not be the latest BIOS version for this motherboard. Visit ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest BIOS file. DO NOT shutdown or reset the system while updating the BIOS! Doing so may cause system boot failure! If there is no floppy disk found in the drive, the system automatically checks the CD-ROM.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-7 4.2 BIOS Setup pr ogram This motherboard supports a programmable firmware hub (FWH) that you can update using the provided utility described in section â4.1 Managing and updating your BIOS.â Use the BIOS Setup program when you are installing a motherboard, reconfiguring your system, or prompted to âRun Setupâ. This section explains how to configure your system using this utility . Even if you are not prompted to use the Setup program, you may want to change the configuration of your computer in the future. For example, you may want to enable the security password feature or change the power management settings. This requires you to reconfigure your system using the BIOS Setup program so that the computer can recognize these changes and record them in the CMOS RAM of the firmware hub. The firmware hub on the motherboard stores the Setup utility . When you start up the computer , the system provides you with the opportunity to run this program. Press <Delete> during the Power-On Self T est (POST) to enter the Setup utility . Otherwise, POST continues with its test routines. If you wish to enter Setup after POST , restart the system by pressing <Ctrl> <Alt> <Delete>, or by pressing the reset button on the system chassis. Y ou can also restart by turning the system off and then back on. Do this last option only if the first two failed. The Setup program is designed to make it as easy to use as possible. It is a menu-driven program, which means you can scroll through the various sub-menus and make your selections from the available options using the navigation keys. The BIOS setup screens shown in this chapter are for reference purposes only , and may not exactly match what you see on your screen. V isit the ASUS website (www .asus.com) to download the latest product and BIOS information. The default BIOS settings for this motherboard apply for most conditions to ensure optimum performance. If the system becomes unstable after changing any BIOS settings, load the default settings to ensure system compatibility and stability . Select the Load Default Settings item under the Exit Menu. See section â4.7 Exit Menu.â
4-8 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup 4.2.2 Menu bar The menu bar on top of the screen has the following main items: Main For changing the basic system configuration Advanced For changing the advanced system settings Power For changing the advanced power management (APM) configuration Boot For changing the system boot configuration Exit For selecting the exit options and loading default settings 4.2.1 BIOS menu screen T o select an item on the menu bar , press the right or left arrow key on the keyboard until the desired item is highlighted. 4.2.3 Navigation keys At the bottom right corner of a menu screen are the navigation keys for that particular menu. Use the navigation keys to select items in the menu and change the settings. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Navigation keys General help Menu bar Sub-menu items Configuration fields Menu items Some of the navigation keys differ from one screen to another .
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-9 4.2.4 Menu items The highlighted item on the menu bar displays the specific items for that menu. For example, selecting Main shows the Main menu items. The other items (Advanced, Power , Boot, and Exit) on the menu bar have their respective menu items. 4.2.5 Sub-menu items An item with a sub-menu on any menu screen is distinguished by a solid triangle before the item. T o display the sub-menu, select the item and press Enter . 4.2.6 Configuration fields These fields show the values for the menu items. If an item is user- configurable, you may change the value of the field opposite the item. Y ou can not select an item that is not user-configurable. A configurable field is enclosed in brackets, and is highlighted when selected. T o change the value of a field, select it then press Enter to display a list of options. Refer to â4.2.7 Pop-up window .â 4.2.7 Pop-up window Select a menu item then press Enter to display a pop-up window with the configuration options for that item. 4.2.8 Scroll bar A scroll bar appears on the right side of a menu screen when there are items that do not fit on the screen. Press Up/ Down arrow keys or PageUp/ PageDown keys to display the other items on the screen. 4.2.9 General help At the top right corner of the menu screen is a brief description of the selected item. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Main menu items Scroll bar Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced Chipset settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in the sections below may cause system to malfunction. Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Memory Acceleration Mode [Auto] DRAM Idle Timer [Auto] DRAm Refresh Rate [Auto] Graphic Adapter Priority [AGP/PCI] Graphics Aperture Size [ 64 MB] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] ICH Delayed Transaction [Enabled] MPS Revision [1.4] Pop-up window
4-10 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup 4.3 Main menu When you enter the BIOS Setup program, the Main menu screen appears giving you an overview of the basic system information. 4.3.1 System T ime [xx:xx:xxxx] This item allows you to set the system time. 4.3.2 System Date [Day xx/xx/xxxx] This item allows you to set the system date. 4.3.3 Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in.] Sets the type of floppy drive installed. Configuration options: [Disabled] [360K, 5.25 in.] [1.2M , 5.25 in.] [720K , 3.5 in.] [1.44M, 3.5 in.] [2.88M, 3.5in.] 4.3.4 Language [English] This field allows you to choose the BIOS language version from the available options. System Time [11:10:19] System Date [Thu 03/27/2003] Legacy Diskette A [1.44M, 3.5 in] Language [English] Primary IDE Master :[ST320413A] Primary IDE Slave :[ASUS CD-S340] Secondary IDE Master :[Not Detected] Secondary IDE Slave :[Not Detected] Third IDE Master :[Not Detected] Fourth IDE Master :[Not Detected] IDE Configuration System Information Use [ENTER], [TAB] or [SHIFT-TAB] to select a field. Use [ ] or [-] to configure system time. Select Screen Select Item - Change Field Tab Select Field F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Refer to section â4.2.1 BIOS menu screenâ for information on the menu screen items and how to navigate through them.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-11 4.3.5 Primary and Secondary IDE Master/Slave; Third and Fourth IDE Master While entering Setup, BIOS auto-detects the presence of IDE devices. There is a separate sub-menu for each IDE device. Select a device item then press Enter to display the IDE device information. The values opposite the dimmed items (Device, V endor , Size, LBA Mode, Block Mode, PIO Mode, Async DMA, Ultra DMA, and SMAR T monitoring) are auto-detected by BIOS and are not user-configurable. These items show N/A if no IDE device is installed in the system. T ype [Auto] Selects the type of IDE drive. Setting to Auto allows automatic selection of the appropriate IDE device type. Select CDROM if you are specifically configuring a CD-ROM drive. Select ARMD (A T API Removable Media Device) if your device is either a ZIP , LS-120, or MO drive. Configuration options: [Not Installed] [Auto] [CDROM] [ARMD] LBA/Large Mode [Auto] Enables or disables the LBA mode. Setting to Auto enables the LBA mode if the device supports this mode, and if the device was not previously formatted with LBA mode disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Block (Multi-sector T ransfer) [Auto] Enables or disables data multi-sectors transfers. When set to Auto, the data transfer from and to the device occurs multiple sectors at a time if the device supports multi-sector transfer feature. When set to Disabled, the data transfer from and to the device occurs one sector at a time. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto] Device : Hard Disk Vendor : ST320413A Size : 20.0GB LBA Mode : Supported Block Mode : 16 Sectors PIO Mode : Supported Async DMA : MultiWord DMA-2 Ultra DMA : Ultra DMA-5 SMART Monitoring: Supported Select the type of device connected to the system. Primary IDE Master Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Type LBA/Large Mode Block (Multi-sector Transfer) PIO Mode DMA Mode Smart Monitoring 32Bit Data Transfer [Auto] [Auto] [Auto] [Auto] [Auto] [Auto] [Disabled]
4-12 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup PIO Mode [Auto] Selects the PIO mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] DMA Mode [Auto] Selects the DMA mode. Configuration options: [Auto] [SWDMA0] [SWDMA1] [SWDMA2] [MWDMA0] [MWDMA1] [MWDMA2] [UDMA0] [UDMA1] [UDMA2] [UDMA3] [UDMA4] [UDMA5] SMAR T Monitoring [Auto] Sets the Smart Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting T echnology . Configuration options: [Auto] [Disabled] [Enabled] 32Bit Data T ransfer [Disabled] Enables or disables 32-bit data transfer . Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] IDE Configuration Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Enhanced Mode Support On [S-ATA] Configure S-ATA as RAID [No] IDE Detect Time Out (Sec) [35] 4.3.6 IDE Configuration The items in this menu allow you to set or change the configurations for the IDE devices installed in the system. Select an item then press Enter if you wish to configure the item. Onboard IDE Operate Mode [Enhanced Mode] Allows selection of the IDE operation mode depending on the operating system (OS) that you installed. Set to Enhanced Mode if you are using native OS, such as Windows 2000/XP . Set to Compatible Mode if you are using legacy OS including MS-DOS, Windows ME/98/NT4.0. Configuration options: [Compatible Mode] [Enhanced Mode]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-13 Enhanced Mode Support On [S-A T A] The default setting S-A T A allows you to use native OS on Serial A T A and Parallel A T A ports. W e recommend that you do not change the default setting for better OS compatibility . In this setting, you may use legacy OS on the Parallel A T A ports only if you did not install any Serial A T A device. The P-A T A S-A T A and P-A T A options are for advanced users only . If you set to any of these options and encounter problems, revert to the default setting S-A T A . Configuration options: [P-A T A S-A T A] [S-A T A] [P-A T A] IDE Port Settings [Primary P-A T A S-A T A] Allows selection of the IDE ports to activate if you are using a legacy operating system. Set to [Primary P-A T A S-A T A] if you wish to use the primary Parallel A T A and Serial A T A ports, or set to [Secondary P-A T A SA T A] to enable the secondary P-A T A port instead. Setting to [P-A T A Ports Only] disables the two Serial A T A ports supported by ICH5. Configuration options: [Primary P-A T A S-A T A] [Secondary P-A T A S-A T A] [P-A T A Ports Only] IDE Detect T ime Out [35] Selects the time out value for detecting A T A/A T API devices. Configuration options: [0] [5] [10] [15] [20] [25] [30] [35] Refer to the section âParallel A T A and Serial A T A device configurationsâ on page 2-26 for the appropriate settings of the IDE Configuration items under different operating systems. The Enhanced Mode Support On appears only when the item Onboard IDE Operate Mode is set to Enhanced Mode . The IDE Port Settings appears only when the item Onboard IDE Operate Mode is set to Compatible Mode . Configure S-A T A as RAID [No] This field configures the S-A T A to function as an IDE controller or RAID. Configuration options: [Y es] [No] Serial A T A BOOTROM [Enabled] This field enables or disables the Serial A T A boot ROM. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The Serial A T A BOOTROM item appears only when the item Configure S-A T A as RAID is set to [Y es] .
4-14 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit AMI BIOS Version : 08.00.08 Build Date : 04/03/03 ID : P4P81035 Processor Type : Intel(R) Pentium(R) 4 CPU 1.73GHz Speed : 1733 MHz Count : 1 System Memory Size : 256MB 4.3.7 System Information This menu gives you an overview of the general system specifications. The items in this menu are auto-detected by BIOS. AMI BIOS This item displays the auto-detected BIOS information. Processor This item displays the auto-detected CPU specification. System Memory This item displays the auto-detected system memory .
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-15 4.4 Advanced menu The Advanced menu items allow you to change the settings for the CPU and other system devices. JumperFree Configuration CPU Configuration Chipset Onboard Devices Configuration PCI PnP USB Configuration Speech Configuration Instant Music Configuration Configure CPU. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.4.1 JumperFree Configuration Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit AI Overclock Tuner [Standard] CPU Ratio [12] Performance Mode [Auto] Configure System Frequency/Voltage AI Overclock T uner [Standard] Allows selection of CPU overclocking options to achieve desired CPU internal frequency . Select either one of the preset overclocking options. Configuration options: [Manual] [Standard] [Overclock 5%] [Overclock 10%] [Overclock 20%] [Overclock 30%] T ake caution when changing the settings of the Advanced menu items. Incorrect field values may cause the system to malfunction. Selecting a very high CPU frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting.
4-16 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit AI Overclock Tuner [Manual] CPU External Frequency (MHz) [100] CPU Ratio [12] DRAM Frequency [Auto] AGP/PCI Frequency (MHz) [Auto] CPU VCore Offset to .IV [Disabled] DDR Reference Voltage [Auto] AGP VDDQ Voltage [1.50V] Performance Mode [Auto] Configure System Frequency/Voltage When you set the AI Overclocking T uner item to [Manual], the related overclocking items appear . If you are using an unlocked CPU, the item CPU Ratio appears under the AI Overclock T uner item. Y ou may select your desired ratio from the available options. CPU Ratio [12] This field sets the ratio between the CPU Core Clock and the Front Side Bus (FSB) Frequency . If an invalid ratio is set in CMOS, the actual and setpoint values may differ . Performance Mode [Auto] Allows enhanced system performance. Setting to [T urbo] may cause the system to become unstable. If this happens, revert to the default setting [Auto]. Configuration options: [Auto] [Standard] [T urbo] CPU External Frequency (MHz) [XXX] (value is auto-detected) Indicates the frequency sent by the clock generator to the system bus and PCI bus. The bus frequency (external frequency) multiplied by the bus multiple equals the CPU speed. The value of this item is auto-detected by BIOS and is not manually configurable. The values range from 100 to 400. Refer to the following table for the correct Front Side Bus and CPU External Frequency settings. Front Side Bus CPU External Frequency FSB 800 200 MHz FSB 533 133 MHz FSB 400 100 MHz T able 4.4.1 FSB/CPU External Frequency Synchronization
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-17 DDR Reference V oltage [Auto] Allows selection of the DDR SDRAM operating voltage. Configuration options: [2.85V] [2.75V] [2.65V] [2.55V] [Auto] AGP VDDQ voltage [1.50V] Allows selection of the AGP operating voltage. Configuration options: [1.80V] [1.70V] [1.60V] [1.50V] Refer to the CPU documentation before setting the CPU VCore voltage. A very high Vcore voltage may severely damage the CPU! Selecting a very high AGP/PCI frequency may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting. CPU VCore V oltage [Auto] Allows you to select a specific CPU VCore voltage. Configuration options: [Auto] [1.6000V] ... [1.4750V] DRAM Frequency [Auto] Allows you to set the DDR operating frequency . Configuration options: [266 MHz] [333 MHz] [400 MHz] [Auto] AGP/PCI Frequency (MHz) [Auto] Allows you to adjust to a higher AGP/PCI frequency for better system performance and overclocking capability . Configuration options: [Auto] [66.66/33.33] [72.73/36.36] [80.00/40.00]
4-18 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup 4.4.2 CPU Configuration The items in this menu show the CPU-related information auto-detected by BIOS. Hyper-Threading T echnology [Enabled] This item allows you to enable or disable the processor Hyper-Threading T echnology . Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Manufacturer : Intel(R) Brand String : Intel(R) Pentium(R) 4 CPU 1.73GHz Frequency : 1733 MHz Ratio Status : Locked Ratio Actual Value : 13 Hyper Threading Technology [Enabled] Configure advanced CPU settings The item Hyper-Threading T echnology appears only if you installed an Intel Pentium 4 CPU that supports this feature. See page 2-4 for details. 4.4.3 Chipset The Chipset menu items allow you to change the advanced chipset settings. Select an item then press Enter to display the sub-menu. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Advanced Chipset settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in the sections below may cause system to malfunction. Configure DRAM Timing by SPD [Enabled] Memory Acceleration Mode [Auto] DRAM Idle Timer [Auto] DRAm Refresh Rate [Auto] Graphic Adapter Priority [AGP/PCI] Graphics Aperture Size [ 64 MB] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] ICH Delayed Transaction [Enabled] MPS Revision [1.4]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-19 The following sub-items appear only when the item Configure DRAM Timing by SPD is set to Disabled. Configure DRAM T iming by SPD [Enabled] When this item is enabled, the DRAM timing parameters are set according to the DRAM SPD (Serial Presence Detect). When disabled, you can manually set the DRAM timing parameters through the DRAM sub-items. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Memory Acceleration Mode [Auto] This field when [Enabled] minimize latencies from CPU to memory to boost system performance. Configuration options: [Auto] [Enabled] If the system becomes unstable after changing the settings of any of the above items, revert to the default settings. DRAM Idle T imer [Auto] Configuration options: [Infinite] [0T] [8T] [16T] [64T] [Auto] DRAM Refresh Mode [Auto] Configuration options: [Auto] [15.6 uSec] [7.8 uSec] [64 uSec] [64T] Setting to [Enabled] may cause the system to become unstable! If this happens, revert to the default setting [Auto] . DRAM CAS# Latency [2.5 Clocks] This item controls the latency between the SDRAM read command and the time the data actually becomes available. Configuration options: [2.0 Clocks] [2.5 Clocks] [3.0 Clocks] DRAM RAS# Precharge [4 Clocks] This item controls the idle clocks after issuing a precharge command to the DDR SDRAM. Configuration options: [4 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [2 Clocks] DRAM RAS# to CAS# Delay [4 Clocks] This item controls the latency between the DDR SDRAM active command and the read/write command. Configuration options: [4 Clocks] [3 Clocks] [2 Clocks] DRAM Precharge Delay [8 Clocks] Configuration options: [8 Clocks] [7 Clocks] [6 Clocks] [5 Clocks] DRAM Burst Length [4 Clocks] Configuration options: [4 Clocks] [8 Clocks]
4-20 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Graphic Adapter Priority [AGP/PCI] Allows selection of the graphics controller to use as primary boot device. Configuration options: [AGP/PCI] [PCI/AGP] Graphics Aperture Size [64MB] Allows you to select the size of mapped memory for AGP graphic data. Configuration options: [4MB] [8MB] [16MB] [32MB] [64MB] [128MB] [256MB] Spread Spectrum [Enabled] This field enables or disables the clock generator spread spectrum. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] ICH Delayed T ransaction [Enabled] Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] MPS Revision [1.1] Configuration options: [1.1] [1.4] 4.4.4 Onboard Devices Configuration Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit OnBoard ACâ97 Audio [Auto] OnBoard VT6410 RAID Controller [Enabled] OnBoard IEEE 1394 Controller [Enabled] OnBoard LAN [Enabled] OnBoard LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] Onboard Floppy Controller [Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Parallel Port Address [378] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] OnBoard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] OnBoard ACâ97 Audio [Auto] [Auto] allows the BIOS to detect whether you are using any audio device. If an audio device is detected, the onboard audio controller is enabled; if no audio device is detected, the controller is disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Auto]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-21 OnBoard VT6410 RAID Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard VIA ® VT6410 RAID controller . Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnBoard IEEE 1394 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard IEEE 1394 controller . Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnBoard LAN [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the onboard LAN controller . Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] OnBoard Floppy Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the floppy disk controller . Configuration options: [Disabled] [ Enabled] Serial Port1 Address [3F8/IRQ4] Allows you to select the Serial Port1 base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [3F8/IRQ4] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Serial Port2 Address [2F8/IRQ3] Allows you to select the Serial Port2 base address. Configuration options: [Disabled] [2F8/IRQ3] [3E8/IRQ4] [2E8/IRQ3] Parallel Port Address [378] Allows you to select the Parallel Port base addresses. Configuration options: [Disabled] [378] [278] [3BC] Parallel Port Mode [ECP] Allows you to select the Parallel Port mode. Configuration options: [Normal] [Bi-directional] [EPP] [ECP] ECP Mode DMA Channel [DMA3] Configuration options: [DMA0] [DMA1] [DMA3] 3Com ® 3C940 does NOT support S5 W ake-On-LAN function under DOS mode or Window ® MEâ¢. OnBoard LAN Boot ROM [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the option ROM in the onboard LAN controller . This item appears only when the Onboard LAN item is set to Enabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-22 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup 4.4.5 PCI PnP The PCI PnP menu items allow you to change the advanced settings for PCI/PnP devices. The menu includes setting IRQ and DMA channel resources for either PCI/PnP or legacy ISA devices, and setting the memory size block for legacy ISA devices. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Plug and Play OS [No] PCI Latency Timer [64] Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Yes] Palette Snooping [Disabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] Advanced PCI/PnP settings WARNING: Setting wrong values in the sections below may cause system to malfunction. NO: Lets the bIOS configure all the devices in the system. YES: Lets the operating system configure Plug and Play (PnP) devices not required for boot if your system has a Plug and Play operating system. IRQ3 [Available] IRQ4 [Available] IRQ5 [Available] IRQ7 [Available] IRQ9 [Available] IRQ10 [Available] IRQ11 [Available] IRQ14 [Available] IRQ15 [Available] T ake caution when changing the settings of the PCI PnP menu items. Incorrect field values may cause the system to malfunction. Parallel Port IRQ [IRQ7] Configuration options: [IRQ5] [IRQ7] Onboard Game/MIDI Port [Disabled] Allows you to select the Game Port address or to disable the port. Configuration options: [Disabled] [200/300] [200/330] [208/300] [208/330] Plug and Play O/S [No] When set to [No], BIOS configures all the devices in the system. When set to [Y es] and if you installed a Plug & Play operating system, the operating system configures the Plug & Play devices not required for boot. Configuration options: [No] [Y es] PCI Latency T imer [64] Allows you to select the value in units of PCI clocks for the PCI device latency timer register . Configuration options: [32] [64] [96] [128] [160] [192] [224] [248]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-23 The Module V ersion and USB Devices Enabled items show the auto- detected values. If no USB device is detected, the item shows None. Allocate IRQ to PCI VGA [Y es] When set to [Y es], BIOS assigns an IRQ to PCI VGA card if the card requests for an IRQ. When set to [No], BIOS does not assign an IRQ to the PCI VGA card even if requested. Configuration options: [No] [Y es] Pallete Snooping [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], the pallete snooping feature informs the PCI devices that an ISA graphics device is installed in the system so that the latter can function correctly . Setting to [Disabled] deactivates this feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] PCI IDE BusMaster [Enabled] Allows BIOS to use PCI bus mastering when reading/writing to IDE devices. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] IRQ xx [A vailable] When set to [Available], the specific IRQ is free for use of PCI/PnP devices. When set to [Reserved], the IRQ is reserved for legacy ISA devices. Configuration options: [A vailable] [Reserved] 4.4.6 USB Configuration The items in this menu allows you to change the USB-related features. Select an item then press Enter to display the configuration options. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Module Version : 2.22.4-5.3 USB Devices Enabled : None USB Function [8 USB Ports] Legacy USB Support [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] USB Mass Storage Device Configuration USB Configuration Enables USB host controllers.
4-24 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit USB Mass Storage Reset Delay [20 Sec] No USB Mass Storage device detected Device #1 N/A Emulation Type [N/A] Device #2 N/A Emulation Type [N/A] Device #3 N/A Emulation Type [N/A] Device #4 N/A Emulation Type [N/A] Device #5 N/A Emulation Type [N/A] Device #6 N/A Emulation Type [N/A] USB Mass Storage Device Configuration Number of seconds POST waits for the USB mass storage device after that start unit command. USB Mass Storage Device Configuration Legacy USB Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for legacy USB devices. Setting to Auto allows the system to detect the presence of USB devices at startup. If detected, the USB controller legacy mode is enabled. If no USB device is detected, the legacy USB support is disabled. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] USB 2.0 Controller [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the USB 2.0 controller . Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] USB 2.0 Controller Mode [HiSpeed] Allows you to configure the USB 2.0 controller in HiSpeed (480 Mbps) or Full Speed (12 Mbps). Configuration options: [HiSpeed ] [Full Speed] USB Function [8 USB Ports] Allows you to set the number of USB ports to activate. Configuration options: [Disabled] [2 USB Ports] [4 USB Ports] [6 USB Ports] [8 USB Ports] USB Mass Storage Reset Delay [20 Sec] Allows you to select the number of seconds POST waits for the USB mass storage device after the start unit command. The message âNo USB mass storage device detectedâ appears if none is installed in the system. Configuration options: [10 Sec ] [20 Sec] [30 Sec] [40 Sec]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-25 Emulation T ype [N/A] When set to Auto, USB devices less than 530MB will be emulated as floppy drive, and the remaining drives as hard drives. Forced FDD option can be used to force an HDD formatted drive to boot as FDD (for example, ZIP drive). The Device and Emulation T ype items appear only when there are installed USB devices. 4.4.7 Speech Configuration Speech POST Reporter [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Speech POST Reporter⢠feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The following items appear only when Speech POST Reporter is set to Enabled. Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Speech Post Reporter [Enabled] Report IDE Error [Disabled] Report System Booting [Disabled] Speech Option Disable/Enable Speech. -
4-26 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Instant Music [Disabled] Instant Music Option Disable/Enable Instant Music feature. 4.4.8 Instant Music Configuration Instant Music [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Instant Music feature in BIOS. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Instant Music CD-ROM Drive [IDE Secondary Master] Allows you to select the CD-ROM drive that you wish to use for the Instant Music CD playback. Configuration options: [IDE Primary Master] [IDE Primary Slave] [IDE Secondary Master] [IDE Secondary Slave] When Instant Music is enabled, the PS/2 keyboard power up feature is automatically disabled. See page 5-14 for details. The above item appears only if you enabled the Instant Music item.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-27 4.5 P ower menu The Power menu items allow you to change the settings for the Advanced Power Management (APM). Select an item then press Enter to display the configuration options. Suspend Mode [Auto] Repost Video on S3 Resume [No] ACPI 2.0 Support [No] ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] BIOS -> AML ACPI table [Enabled] APM Configuration Hardware Monitor Configure CPU. Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.5.1 Suspend Mode [Auto] Allows you to select the ACPI state to be used for system suspend. Configuration options: [S1 (POS) Only] [S3 Only] [Auto] 4.5.2 Repost V ideo on S3 Resume [No] Determines whether to invoke VGA BIOS POST on S3/STR resume. Configuration options: [No] [Y es] 4.5.3 ACPI 2.0 Support [No] Allows you to add more tables for ACPI 2.0 specifications. Configuration options: [No] [Y es] 4.5.4 ACPI APIC Support [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the ACPI support in the ASIC. When set to Enabled, the ACPI APIC table pointer is included in the RSDT pointer list. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.5.5 BIOS -> AML ACPI T able [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the inclusion of the BIOS ->AML exchange pointer to (X)RSDT pointer list. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-28 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Power Management/APM [Enabled] Video Power Down Mode [Suspend] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend] Suspend Time Out [Disabled] Throttle Slow Clock Ratio [50%] System Thermal [Disabled] Power Button Mode [On/Off] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Power On By External Modem [Disabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] APM Configuration Enabled or disable APM. 4.5.6 APM Configuration Power Management/APM [Enabled] Allows you to enable or disable the Advanced Power Management (APM) feature. Configuration options: [Disbaled] [Enabled] V ideo Power Down Mode [Suspend] Allows you to select the video power down mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Standby] [Suspend] Hard Disk Power Down Mode [Suspend] Allows you to select the hard disk power down mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Standby] [Suspend] Suspend T ime Out [Disabled] Allows you to select the specified time at which the system goes on suspend. Configuration options: [Disabled] [1-2 Min] [2-3 Min] [4-5 Min] [8-9 Min] [10 Min] [20 Min] [30 Min] [40 Min] [50 Min] [60 Min] Throttle Slow Clock Ratio [50%] Allows you to select the duty cycle in throttle mode. Configuration options: [87.5%] [75.0%] [62.5%] [50%] [37.5%] [25%] [12.5%] System Thermal [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the system thermal feature to generate a power management event. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-29 Power Button Mode [On/Off] Allows the system to go into On/Off mode or suspend mode when the power button is pressed. Configuration options: [On/Of f] [Suspend] Restore on AC Power Loss [Power Off] When set to Power Of f, the system goes into off state after an AC power loss. When set to Power On, the system goes on after an AC power loss. When set to Last State, the system goes into either of f or on state whatever was the system state before the AC power loss. Configuration options: [Power Off] [Power On] [Last State] Power On By RTC Alarm [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable R TC to generate a wake event. When this item is set to Enabled, the items R TC Alarm Date, RTC Alarm Hour , RTC Alarm Minute, and RTC Alarm Second appear with set values. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By External Modem [Disabled] This allows either settings of [Enabled] or [Disabled] for powering up the computer when the external modem receives a call while the computer is in Soft-of f mode. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PCI Devices [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to turn on the system through a PCI LAN or modem card. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PS/2 Keyboard [Disabled] This parameter allows you to use specific keys on the keyboard to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] The computer cannot receive or transmit data until the computer and applications are fully running. Thus, connection cannot be made on the first try . T urning an external modem off and then back on while the computer is of f causes an initialization string that turns the system power on.
4-30 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit CPU Temperature [44°C/111°F] MB Temperature [36°C/96.5°F] Power Temperature [N/A] Q-Fan Control [Disabled] CPU Fan Speed [2250RPM] Chassis Fan Speed [XXX RPM] Power Fan Speed [XXX RPM] VCORE Voltage [1.550V] 3.3V Voltage [3.386V] 5V Voltage [4.890V] 12V Voltage [11.900V] Hardware Monitor CPU temperature 4.5.7 Hardware Monitor MB T emperature [xxxC/xxxF] CPU T emperature [xxxC/xxxF] POWER T emperature [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the motherboard, CPU, and power supply temperatures. Select Disabled if you do not wish to display the detected temperatures. Q-Fan Control [Disabled] This item allows you to enable or disable the ASUS Q-Fan feature that smartly adjusts the fan speeds for more efficient system operation. When this field is set to [Enabled], the Fan Speed Ratio item appears to allow selection of the appropriate fan speed ratio. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Power On By PS/2 Mouse [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this parameter allows you to use the PS/2 mouse to turn on the system. This feature requires an A TX power supply that provides at least 1A on the 5VSB lead. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-31 Fan Speed Ratio [1 1/16] This item allows you to select the appropriate fan speed ratio for the system. The default [1 1/16] is the minimum fan speed ratio. Select a higher ratio if you installed additional devices and the system requires more ventilation. Configuration options: [1 1/16] [12/16] [13/16] [14/16] [15/16] CPU Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Chassis Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] Power Fan Speed [xxxxRPM] or [N/A] The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects and displays the CPU, chassis, and power fan speeds in rotations per minute (RPM). If any of the fans is not connected to the motherboard, the specific field shows N/A. VCORE V oltage, 3.3V V oltage, 5V V oltage, 12V V oltage The onboard hardware monitor automatically detects the voltage output through the onboard voltage regulators. The above item appears only when the Q-Fan Control item is set to Enabled. If any of the monitored items is out of range, the following error message appears: âHardware Monitor found an error . Enter Power setup menu for detailsâ. Y ou will then be prompted to âPress F1 to continue or DEL to enter SETUPâ.
4-32 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup 4.6 Boot menu The Boot menu items allow you to change the system boot options. Select an item then press Enter to display the sub-menu. Boot Device Priority Hard Disk Drives Boot Settings Configuration Security Specifies the Boot Device Priority sequence. Boot Settings Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 4.6.1 Boot Device Priority Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 1st Boot Device [1st FLOPPY DRIV] 2nd Boot Device [PM-ST320413A] 3rd Boot Device [PS-ASUS CD-S340] Boot Device Priority Specifies the boot sequence from the available devices. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding type menu. 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [1st Floppy Drive] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available devices. The number of device items that appear on the screen depends on the the number of devices installed in the system. Configuration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-33 4.6.2 Hard disk drives Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit 1st Boot Device [PM-ST320413A] 2nd Boot Device [PS-ASUS CD-S340] Boot Device Priority Specifies the boot sequence from the available devices. A device enclosed in parenthesis has been disabled in the corresponding type menu. 1st ~ xxth Boot Device [(Hard disk drive model name)] These items specify the boot device priority sequence from the available hard disk drives. The number of items that appear on the screen depends on the the number of hard disk drives installed in the system. Configuration options: [xxxxx Drive] [Disabled] 4.6.3 Boot Settings Configuration Quick Boot [Enabled] Full Screen Logo [Enabled] Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Bootup Num-Lock [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Typematic Rate [Fast] Parity Check [Disabled] Boot to OS/2 [No] Wait for âF1â If Error [Enabled] Hit âDELâ Message Display [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Boot Settings Configuration Allows BIOS to skip certain tests while booting. This will decrease the time needed to boot the system. Quick Boot [Enabled] Enabling this item allows the BIOS to skip some power on self tests (POST) while booting to decrease the time needed to boot the system. When set to [Disabled], BIOS performs all the POST items. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
4-34 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Add On ROM Display Mode [Force BIOS] Sets the display mode for option ROM. Configuration options: [Force BIOS] [Keep Current] Bootup Num-Lock [On] Allows you to select the power-on state for the NumLock. Configuration options: [Off] [On] PS/2 Mouse Support [Auto] Allows you to enable or disable support for PS/2 mouse. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] [Auto] T ypematic Rate [Fast] Allows you to select the keyboard typematic rate. Configuration options: [Slow] [Fast] Parity Check [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the memory parity error checking. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Boot to OS/2 [No] Allows you to specify the OS/2 compatibility mode. Configuration options: [No] [Y es] W ait for âF1â If Error [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system waits for F1 key to be pressed when error occurs. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Hit âDEL â Message Display [Enabled] When set to Enabled, the system displays the message âPress DEL to run Setupâ during POST . Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Interrupt 19 Capture [Disabled] When set to [Enabled], this function allows the option ROMs to trap Interrupt 19. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] Make sure that the above item is set to [Enabled] if you wish to use the ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature. Full Screen Logo [Enabled] This allows you to enable or disable the full screen logo display feature. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled]
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-35 4.6.4 Security The Security menu items allow you to change the system security settings. Select an item then press Enter to display the configuration options. Supervisor Password Not Installed User Password Not Installed Change Supervisor Password Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Security Settings <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password. Change Supervisor Password Select this item to set or change the supervisor password. The Supervisor Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed . After you have set a password, this item shows Installed . T o set a Supervisor Password: 1. Select the Change Supervisor Password item and press Enter . 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of letters and/or numbers, then press Enter . Y our password should have at least six characters. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you have successfully set your password. The Supervisor Password item now shows Installed . T o change the supervisor password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. T o clear the supervisor password, select the Change Supervisor Password then press Enter . The message âPassword Uninstalledâ appears. If you forget your BIOS password, you can clear clear it by erasing the CMOS Real T ime Clock (RTC) RAM. See section â2.7 Jumpersâ for information on how to erase the RTC RAM.
4-36 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup User Access Level (Full Access] This item allows you to select the access restriction to the Setup items. Configuration options: [No Access] [View Only] [Limited] [Full Access] No Access prevents user access to the Setup utility . V iew Only allows access but does not allow change to any field. Limited allows change to only selected fields, such as Date and T ime. Full Access allows viewing and changing all the fields in the Setup utility . Change User Password Select this item to set or change the user password. The User Password item on top of the screen shows the default Not Installed. After you have set a password, this item shows Installed . T o set a User Password: 1. Select the Change User Password item and press Enter . 2. On the password box that appears, type a password composed of letters and/or numbers, then press Enter . Y our password should have at least six characters. 3. Confirm the password when prompted. The message âPassword Installedâ appears after you have successfully set your password. The User Password item now shows Installed . Supervisor Password Installed User Password Not Installed Change Supervisor Password User Access Level [Full Access] Change User Password Clear User Password Password Check [Setup] Boot Sector Virus Protection [Disabled] Select Screen Select Item - Change Option F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Security Settings <Enter> to change password. <Enter> again to disable password. After you have set a supervisor password, the other items appear to allow you to change other security settings.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 4-37 T o change the user password, follow the same steps as in setting a user password. Clear User Password Select this item if you wish to clear the user password. Password Check [Setup] When set to [Setup], BIOS checks for user password when accessing the Setup utility . When set to [Always], BIOS checks for user password both when accessing Setup and booting the system. Configuration options: [Setup] [Always] Boot Sector V irus Protection [Disabled] Allows you to enable or disable the boot sector virus protection. Configuration options: [Disabled] [Enabled] 4.7 Exit menu The Exit menu items allow you to load the optimal or failsafe default values for the BIOS items, and save or discard your changes to the BIOS items. Exit & Save Changes Exit & Discard Changes Discard Changes Load Setup Defaults Exit system setup after saving the changes. F10 key can be used for this operation. Exit Options Select Screen Select Item Enter Go to Sub-screen F1 General Help F10 Save and Exit ESC Exit Pressing <Esc> does not immediately exit this menu. Select one of the options from this menu or <F10> from the legend bar to exit.
4-38 Chapter 4: BIOS Setup Exit & Save Changes Once you are finished making your selections, choose this option from the Exit menu to ensure the values you selected are saved to the CMOS RAM. The CMOS RAM is sustained by an onboard backup battery and stays on even when the PC is turned of f. When you select this option, a confirmation window appears. Select [Y es] to save changes and exit. Exit & Discard Changes Select this option only if you do not want to save the changes that you made to the Setup program. If you made changes to fields other than system date, system time, and password, the BIOS asks for a confirmation before exiting. Discard Changes This option allows you to discard the selections you made and restore the previously saved values. After selecting this option, a confirmation appears. Select [Y es] to discard any changes and load the previously saved values. Load Setup Defaults This option allows you to load the default values for each of the parameters on the Setup menus. When you select this option or if you press <F5>, a confirmation window appears. Select [Y es] to load default values. Select Exit Saving Changes or make other changes before saving the values to the non-volatile RAM. If you attempt to exit the Setup program without saving your changes, the program prompts you with a message asking if you want to save your changes before exiting. Pressing <Enter> saves the changes while exiting.
Chapter 5 Software support This chapter describes the contents of the support CD that comes with the motherboard package.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard Chapter summar y 5.1 Install an operating system ........................... 5-1 5.2 Support CD information ................................ 5-1 5.3 Software information ..................................... 5-7 5.4 RAID 0/ RAID 1 / RAID 0 1 / JBOD ..................... configurations .............................................. 5-25 5.5 Intel ® RAID for Serial A T A configuration .... 5-34 5.6 Using Intel ® / VIA ® Makedisk.exe ................ 5-38 5.7 Marvell ® V irtual Cable T ester⢠(VCT) ................ T echnology ................................................... 5-39
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-1 5. 1 Install an oper ating system This motherboard supports Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP operating system (OS). Always install the latest OS version and corresponding updates so you can maximize the features of your hardware. 5.2 Suppor t CD infor mation The support CD that came with the motherboard contains useful software and several utility drivers that enhance the motherboard features. 5.2.1 Running the support CD T o begin using the support CD, simply insert the CD into your CD-ROM drive. The CD automatically displays the Drivers menu if Autorun is enabled in your computer . Click an icon to display more information Click an item to install Because motherboard settings and hardware options vary , use the setup procedures presented in this chapter for general reference only . Refer to your OS documentation for more information. The contents of the support CD are subject to change at any time without notice. Visit the ASUS website for updates. If Autorun is NOT enabled in your computer , browse the contents of the support CD to locate the file ASSETUP .EXE from the BIN folder . Double-click the ASSETUP .EXE to run the CD.
5-2 Chapter 5: Software support 5.2.2 Drivers menu The drivers menu shows the available device drivers if the system detects installed devices. Install the necessary drivers to activate the devices. VIA RAID Driver This item installs the VIA ® RAID support driver . AD1985 Audio Driver and Applications This item executes the wizard to install the SoundMAX audio driver and applications. Intel Chipset Inf Update Program This item installs the Intel ® Chipset INF Update Program that enables Plug-n-Play INF support for Intel ® chipset components. This utility installs to the target system the Windows INF files that outline to the operating system how the chipset components will be configured. Y ou may install this utility in three modes: interactive, silent and unattended preload. The interactive mode requires user input during installation. This is not required in the silent and unattended preload modes. Refer to the online help or readme file that came with the utility . Intel Application Accelerator Driver This item installs the Intel Application Accelerator Driver . If you are using Windows ® XP , this driver allows RAID 0 configuration for the Serial A T A channels. This driver can only be installed when the RAID function of S- A T A is enabled.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-3 5.2.3 Utilities menu The Utilities menu shows the applications and other software that the motherboard supports. ASUS PC Probe This smart utility monitors the fan speed, CPU temperature, and system voltages, and alerts you on any detected problems. This utility helps you keep your computer at a healthy operating condition. Install ASUS Update This program allows you to download the latest version of the BIOS from the ASUS website. Screen display and driver options may not be the same for other operating system versions. Before using the ASUS Update, make sure that you have an Internet connection so you can connect to the ASUS website. Microsoft Direct X 8.1 Driver This item installs the Microsoft V8.0a driver . USB 2.0 Driver This item installs the Universal Serial Bus 2.0 driver . 3Com Gigabit LOM (3C940) Driver This item executes the dialogue box interface for the 3COM NIC driver and diagnostics installation.
5-4 Chapter 5: Software support PC-CILLIN 2002 This item installs the PC-cillin 2002 anti-virus program. View the PC-cillin online help for detailed information. Adobe Acrobat Reader V5.0 This item installs the Adobe Acrobat Reader V5.0. The Acrobat Reader software is for viewing files saved in Portable Document Format (PDF). Winbond V oice Editor This item installs the Winbond V oice Editor software application. ASUS Screen Saver This item installs the ASUS screen saver . E-Color 3Deep This item installs the 3Deep software. 3Deep is the first application that gives online gamers the competitive edge in multi-player skirmishes. This application removes dark washed-out graphics to deliver true vibrant colors. 5.2.4 ASUS Contact Information Clicking the ASUS Contact Information tab displays as stated. Y ou may also find this information on page x of this user guide. Screen display and utilities option may not be the same for other operating system versions.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-5 5.2.5 Other information The icons on the top right corner of the screen give additional information on the motherboard and the contents of the support CD. Click an icon to display the specified information. Motherboard Info The window displays the general specifications of the P4P800 Deluxe motherboard. Browse this CD The window displays the support CD contents in graphical format.
5-6 Chapter 5: Software support T echnical Support Form The window displays the ASUS T echnical Support Request Form that you have to fill up when requesting technical support. Filelist The window displays the contents of the support CD and a brief description of each in text format.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-7 5.3 Sof twar e information Most of the applications in the support CD have wizards that will conveniently guide you through the installation. View the online help or readme file that came with the software for more information. This section provides details on the software applications that the motherboard supports. 5.3.1 ASUS Update The ASUS Update is a utility that allows you to update the motherboard BIOS and drivers. This utility requires an Internet connection either through a network or an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Follow these steps to use the ASUS Update. 2. Select your desired update method, then click Next. 1. Launch the utility from your Windows Start menu: Programs/AsusUpdate Vx.xx.xx/ AsusUpdate The ASUS Update initial screen appears. 3. If you selected updating/ downloading from the Internet, select the ASUS FTP site nearest you to avoid network traffic, or choose Auto Select. Click Next.
5-8 Chapter 5: Software support 4. From the FTP site, select the BIOS version that you wish to download. Click Next. 5. Follow the instructions on the succeeding screens to complete the update process. If you selected the option to update the BIOS from a file, a window pops up prompting you to locate the file. Select the file, click Save, then follow the screen instructions to complete the update process. 5.3.2 ASUS MyLogo2⢠The ASUS MyLogo2⢠is automatically installed when you install the ASUS Update utility from the software menu. See section â5.2.3 Utilities menuâ. 1. Launch the ASUS Update utility . See section â5.3.1 ASUS Update.â 2. When prompted for the BIOS update method, select the option âUpdate BIOS from a file.â 3. Specify the location of the BIOS file, such as from a floppy disk. Click Next. Follow these steps to use ASUS MyLogo2. Before using ASUS MyLogo2⢠feature, use the AFUDOS utility to make a copy of your original BIOS file, or obtain the latest BIOS version from the ASUS website. Make sure that the BIOS Item Full Screen Logo is set to [Enabled] if you wish to use ASUS MyLogo2. See page 4-34.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-9 4. From the selection that appears, choose a logo image. Click Next. 6. The next screen prompts you to flash the original BIOS to update it with the new boot logo. Click Flash to update the BIOS. 7. When finished, click Exit, then reboot your computer . Y our system boots with the new boot logo. 5. When you click on an image, it displays larger on the MyLogo2 screen. If you wish, you may create your own boot logo image in GIF , JPG, or BMP file formats. If you wish to make the logo image smaller , click on the arrow on the Ratio item and select your desired scale. Instead of starting from ASUS Update, you may also launch ASUS MyLogo2 directly from the Windows Start menu to change your BIOS boot logo. After you have modified the BIOS file with the new logo, use the ASUS Update utility to upload the new BIOS.
5-10 Chapter 5: Software support 5.3.3 ASUS PC Probe The ASUS PC Probe is a convenient utility to continuously monitor your computer systemâs vital components, such as fan rotations, voltages, and temperatures. It also has the DMI Explorer utility that lets you review useful information about your computer , such as hard disk space, memory usage, and CPU type, CPU speed, and internal/external frequencies. Starting ASUS PC Probe When ASUS PC Probe starts, a splash screen appears allowing you to select whether to show the screen again when you open PC Probe or not. T o bypass this startup screen, clear the Show up in next execution check box. The PC Probe icon appears on the taskbar system tray indicating that ASUS PC Probe is running. Clicking the icon allows you to see the status of your PC. T o launch ASUS PC Probe , click the Windows Start button, point to Programs , and then ASUS Utility , and then click Probe Vx.xx .
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-11 Using ASUS PC Probe Monitoring Monitor Summary Shows a summary of the items being monitored. T emperature Monitor Shows the PC temperature (for supported processors only). T emperature Warning threshold adjustment (Move the slider up to increase the threshold level or down to decrease the threshold level) Fan Monitor Shows the PC fan rotation. V oltage Monitor Shows the PC voltages. Fan W arning threshold adjustment (Move the slider up to increase the threshold level or down to decrease the threshold level)
5-12 Chapter 5: Software support Settings Lets you set threshold levels and polling intervals or refresh times of the PCâs temperature, fan rotation, and voltages. History Lets you record the monitoring activity of a certain component of your PC for future reference. Hard Drives Shows the used and free space of the PCâs hard disk drives and the file allocation table or file system used. CPU Cooling System Setup Lets you select when to enable software CPU cooling. When When CPU Overheated is selected, the CPU cooling system is enabled whenever the CPU temperature reaches the threshold value. Fan Control Lets you enable/disable Smart Fan Control. Smart Fan Control adjusts the fan speed automatically based on the current CPU temperature and predefined threshold.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-13 Device Summary Shows a summary of devices present in your PC. DMI Explorer Shows information pertinent to the PC, such as CPU type, CPU speed, and internal/external frequencies, and memory size. Utility Lets you run programs outside of the ASUS Probe modules. T o run a program, click Execute Program . NOTE: This feature is currently unavailable. Information Memory Shows the PC memory load, memory usage, and paging file usage.
5-14 Chapter 5: Software support ASUS PC Probe T ask Bar Icon Right clicking the PC Probe icon brings up a menu to open or exit ASUS PC Probe and pause or resume all system monitoring. When the ASUS PC Probe senses a problem with your PC, portions of the ASUS PC Probe icon change to red, the PC speaker beeps, and the ASUS PC Probe monitor appears. 5.3.4 ASUS Instant Music The ASUS Instant Music is a BIOS-based audio playback feature that allows you to play audio CDs without booting the system. This feature is supported by the onboard audio ACâ97 CODEC, and requires an optical drive (CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, or CD-RW). 1. Instant Music only supports CDs in audio format. 2. Instant Music would not work if you installed and enabled an add-on sound card. 3. Instant Music only supports PS/2 keyboard. T o enable ASUS Instant Music: 1. Connect the analog audio cable from the optical drive (CD-ROM, DVD- ROM, or CD-R W drive) to the 4-pin CD-In connector (labeled CD1) on the motherboard. See section â2.8 Connectorsâ for the connector location. Make sure to connect the CD-ROM audio cable. Otherwise, you cannot control the audio volume using the Instant Music function keys. 2. T urn on the system and enter BIOS by pressing the Delete key during the Power On Self-T ests (POST). 3. In the Advanced Menu Instant Music Configuration menu, select the item Instant Music and set it to Enabled . â
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-15 4. Highlight the Instant Music CDROM item and press Enter to display the CD-ROM options. Select the CD-ROM drive that you wish to use for this feature. 5. Save your changes and exit BIOS Setup. 1. The Scroll Lock LED is fixed to ON after enabling Instant Music. 2. When set to Instant Music mode, the system wake-up features (LAN, keyboard, mouse, USB) are deactivated. In this case, power up the system using the power switch. 3. If the system lost connection or did not detect any optical drive, the Instant Music feature turns OFF (disabled) automatically . A âbeepâ indicates this condition. T o use ASUS Instant Music: 1. Ensure that the power cord is plugged to a grounded power source, so that the system has a standby power . 2. Place the Instant Music keyboard label over Esc and other function keys on your keyboard (top left corner). The keys covered by the label identify the Instant Music special function keys. Instant Music function keys (Set 1) Esc F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 Instant Music function keys (Set 2) As an alternative, you may also use another set of keys on the keyboard as Instant Music function keys. These keys are indicated by marked numbers in the keyboard illustration below . The functions are defined in the illustration on the right. â â â â â â â â â
5-16 Chapter 5: Software support These labels all come with your motherboard package. 3. Connect speakers or a headphone to the Line Out (lime colored) port on the rear panel for audio output. Y ou may also connect a headphone to the headphone jack on the CD- ROM drive front panel. 4. Place an audio CD on the drive. 5. Press Esc to turn ON Instant Music. 6. Press F1 or the Space Bar to play the first track on the CD. If there is no CD on the drive and you press F1 or Space Bar , the drive tray ejects. 7. Refer to the Instant Music function key definitions on the previous page to select other tracks or control the volume. 8. Press F2 or Enter once to stop playing the CD. Press F2 or Enter one more time to eject the CD.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-17 5.3.5 W inbond V oice Editor The Winbond V oice Editor software allows you to customize the vocal POST messages. Install the software from the software menu in the support CD. See section â5.2.3 Utilities menuâ. Follow these steps to use the Winbond V oice Editor . Launching the program Launch the program either from the Winbond V oice Editor icon on your desktop, or from the Windows Start menu, Programs/Winbond V oice Editor/ V oice Editor . The Winbond V oice Editor screen appears. Playing the default wave files T o play the default wave files, simply click on a POST event on the left side of the screen, then click the Play button. Default Messages POST Events T o avoid conflicts, do not run the Winbond V oice Editor while running the ASUS PC Probe. The default language setting is English.
5-18 Chapter 5: Software support Changing the default language 1. Click on the Load button. a window showing the available languages appears. 2. Select your desired language then click Open. The event messages for the language you selected appear on the V oice Editor screen. 3. Click on the Write button to update the EEPROM. 4. Click Y es on the confirmation window that appears. The next time you boot your computer , the POST messages are announced in the language that you selected . For some languages, not all events have a corresponding message due to file size constraints.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-19 Customizing your POST messages If your language is not in the selection or if you wish to record your own POST messages to replace the pre-installed wave files, you may easily do so. Follow these steps to customize your POST messages. 1. Launch the V oice Editor and take note of the list of POST events on the leftmost column of the screen. 2. Prepare your message for each event. 3. Use a recording software, such as Windows Recorder , to record your messages. 4. Save the messages as wave files (.W A V). It is recommended that you save your files in low quality to keep them small. For example, use 8-bit, mono quality at 22Khz sampling rate. 5. From the V oice Editor screen, click on the Add button to display the Add W ave File window . 6. Copy the wave files that you recorded to the database. Close the window when done. The total compressed size for all the wave files must not exceed 1Mbit, so make your messages as short as possible. Y ou may want to create a separate folder for your wave files so you can locate them easily in one place.
5-20 Chapter 5: Software support If you receive an error message telling you that the files exceed the total allowable size, do one or all of the following. ⢠T ry to modify your messages to make them shorter ⢠Save the wave files at a lower quality ⢠Skip lesser used events like FDD Detection, IDE HDD Detection, etc. 7. Click a POST event on the V oice Editor screen, then on the Edit button. The Event Sound Editor window appears. 8. Locate and select your wave file for the event then click on the arrow opposite V oice1. The file you selected appears on the space next to it. 9. Click OK to return to the V oice Editor screen. 10. Do steps 7 to 9 for the other events. 1 1. When done, click the Save button. A window appears prompting you to save your configuration. 12. T ype a file name with a .flh extension, then click Save. 13. Click on the Write button to compress the file and copy into the EEPROM. 14. Click Y es on the confirmation window that appears.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-21 5.3.6 SoundMAX ® 4 XL software The ADI AD1985 AC â97 audio CODEC provides 6-channel audio capability through the SoundMAX4 XL with AudioESP⢠software to deliver the ultimate audio experience on your PC. The software implements high quality audio synthesis/rendering, 3D sound positioning, and advanced voice-input technologies. Follow the installation wizard install the SoundMAX Audio Driver and Application from the support CD that came with the motherboard package to activate the 6-channel audio feature. Y ou must use 4-channel or 6-channel speakers for this setup. SoundMAX 4 XL requires Microsoft Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP . Make sure that one of these operating systems is installed before installing SoundMAX. If the SoundMAX4 XL software is correctly installed, you will find the SoundMAX4 XL icon on the taskbar . From the taskbar , double-click on the SoundMAX4 XL icon to display the SoundMAX Control Panel . SoundMAX4 XL icon
5-22 Chapter 5: Software support Setup wizards Use the speaker and microphone setup wizards to fine tune the gain/ attenuation of the inputs/outputs for optimal audio performance. Y ou may launch the setup wizards by clicking the Configuration button when AudioESP detects and verifies a newly connected peripheral, or by clicking on the icon from the SoundMAX control panel. Speaker wizard Follow the screen instructions to configure the speakers to your desired settings. Microphone wizard Follow the screen instructions to configure the microphone to your desired settings.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-23 Audio preferences The Preferences page of the SoundMAX4 XL allows you to change various audio settings. Listening environment options The SoundMAX4 XL support several audio technologies including SoundMAX SPX⢠Animated Audio, 3DP Aâ¢, MultiDrive⢠5.1, EnvironmentFCâ¢, MacroFX/ZoomFXâ¢, and V irtual Theater Surround.
5-24 Chapter 5: Software support Rear panel audio ports function variation The functions of the Line Out (lime), Line In (blue), and Mic (pink) ports on the rear panel change when you select the 4-channel or 6-channel audio configuration as shown in the following table. Headphone/ 2-Speaker 4-Speaker 6-Speaker Light Blue Line In Rear Speaker Out Rear Speaker Out Lime Line Out Front Speaker Out Front Speaker Out Pink Mic In Mic In Bass/Center
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-25 5.4 RAID 0 / RAID 1 / RAID 0 1 / JBOD configurations The motherboard includes VIA ® VT6410 high performance IDE RAID controller . It supports RAID 0, RAID 1, RAID 0 1 and JBOD with two independent IDE channels. This controller also complies with Scatter/ Gather host DMA mechanism of Programming Interface for Bus Master IDE Controller Revision 1.0 and builts 64 levels of pre-fetch and write buffer inside to improve the transfer rate. The Dual channel master mode hard disk controller supports up to four Enhanced IDE devices. RAID 0 (called data striping) optimizes two identical hard disk drives to read and write data in parallel, interleaved stacks. T wo hard disks perform the same work as a single drive but at a sustained data transfer rate, double that of a single disk alone, thus improving data access and storage. RAID 1 (called data mirroring) copies and maintains an identical image of data from one drive to a second drive. If one drive fails, the disk array management software directs all applications to the surviving drive as it contains a complete copy of the data in the other drive. This RAID configuration provides data protection and increases fault tolerance to the entire system. RAID 0 1 is data striping and data mirroring combined without parity (redundancy data) having to be calculated and written. The advantage of RAID 0 1 is fast data access (like RAID 0), but with the ability to loose one drive and have a complete duplicate surviving drive or set of drives (like RAID 1). JBOD (for â just a bunch of disksâ or sometimes â just a bunch of drivesâ) is officially termed as â spanningâ. This is used to refer to a computer âs hard disks that havenât been configured according the RAID system to increase fault tolerance and improved data access performance. This RAID system stores the same data redundantly on multiple drives by combining the drives into one larger logical drive. For more information about the VIA ® VT6410 RAID controller , refer to the VIA ® VT6410, IDE RAID Controller user manual found in â\Manual\IAA RAID Manual.docâ of the support CD.
5-26 Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.1 Install the hard disks The VIA ® VT6410 chipset supports UltraDMA133/100/66 hard disk drives. For optimal performance, install identical drives of the same model and capacity when creating a RAID set. ⢠If you are creating a RAID 0 (striping) array for perfomance, use two new drives. ⢠If you are creating a RAID 1 (mirroring) array for protection, you can use two new drives or use an existing drive and a new drive (the new drive must be of the same size or larger than the existing drive). If you use two drives of different sizes, the smaller capacity hard disk will be the base storage size. For example, one hard disk has an 80GB storage capacity and the other hard disk has 60GB storage capacity , the maximum storage capacity for the RAID 1 set is 60GB. Follow these steps to install the hard disks for RAID configuration. 1. Install the IDE hard disks into the drive bays. 2. Using Channel 0: 2.a Connect the RAID IDE cable connector (blue) to the motherboardâs primary IDE RAID slot (PRI_RAID1); 2.b Connect other end of RAID IDE cable connector (black) to the master hard disk; 2.c Connect the remaining IDE RAID connector (gray) to the slave hard disk. 3. Using Channel 1: 3.a Connect the RAID IDE cable connector (blue) to the motherboardâs secondary IDE RAID slot (SEC_RAID1); 3.b Connect other end of RAID IDE cable connector (black) to the master hard disk; 3.c Connect the remaining IDE RAID connector (gray) to the slave hard disk. Before setting up your new RAID array , verify the status of your hard disks. Make sure the Master/Slave jumpers are configured properly .
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-27 5.4.2 Entering VIA ® T ech RAID BIOS Utility 1. Boot-up your computer . 2. During POST , press <T ab> to enter VIA RAID configuration utility . The following menu options will appear . 4. Connect the power cable to the power connector on each drive. 5. Proceed to section 5.4.2 for the next procedure. Channelîîî Drive Nameî Array Nameî Modeî Size(GB) Status Channel0 Masterî XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd Channel0 Slaveîî XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd Channel1 Masterî No Drive Channel1 Slave î No Drive VIA Tech. RAID BIOS Ver 1.00 Create Array Delete Array Create/Delete Spare Select Boot Array Serial Number View Create a RAID array with the hard disk attached to VIA IDE controller F1î : View Array/Disk Status , î : Move to next item Enter: Confirme the selection ESCî : Exit On the upper-right side of the screen is the message and legend box. The keys on the legend box allows you to navigate through the setup menu options. The message describes the function of each menu item. The following lists the keys found in the legend box with their corresponding functions. F1 : View Array/Disk Status â , â : Move to the next item Enter : Confirm the selection ESC : Exit The RAID BIOS information on the setup screen shown is for reference only . What you see on your screen may not be exactly the same as shown.
5-28 Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.3 Create Array 1. In the VIA RAID BIOS utility main menu, select Create Array then press the <Enter> key . The main menu items on the upper-left corner of the screen are replaced with create array menu options. Channelîîî Drive Nameî Array Nameî Modeî Size(GB) Status Channel0 Masterî XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd Channel0 Slaveîî XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd Channel1 Masterî No Drive Channel1 Slave î No Drive VIA Tech. RAID BIOS Ver 1.00 Auto Setup For Data Security Array Mode RAID 1 (Mirroring) Select Disk Drives Start Create Process Create a RAID array with the hard disk attached to VIA IDE controller F1î : View Array/Disk Status , î : Move to next item Enter: Confirm the selection ESCî : Exit 5.4.3.1 RAID 0 for performance 1. Select the second option item Array Mode , then press the <Enter> key . The RAID system setting pop-up menu appears. 2. Select RAID 0 for performance from the menu and press <Enter>. From this point, you may choose to auto-configure the RAID array by selecting Auto Setup for Performance or manually configure the RAID array for stripped sets. If you want to manually configure the RAID array continue with next step, otherwise, proceed to step #5. 3. Select Select Disk Drives , then press <Enter>. Use arrow keys to select disk drive/s, then press <Enter> to mark selected drive. An asterisk is placed before the selected drive. 4. Select Block Size , then press <Enter> to set array block size. A list of valid array block sizes are displayed on a pop-up menu. RAID 1 for data protection RAID 0/1 RAID SPAN for capacity RAID 0 for performance
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-29 5. Select Start Create Process and press <Enter> to setup hard disk for RAID system. The following confirmation message appears: Use arrow keys to move selection bar on items and press <Enter> to select. Press âYâ to confirm or âNâ to return to the configuration options. 5.4.3.2 RAID 1 for data protection 1. Select the second option item Array Mode , then press the <Enter> key . The RAID system setting pop-up menu appears. 2. Select RAID 1 for data protection from the menu and press <Enter>. Select next task from pop-up menu. The task Create only creates the mirrored set without creating a backup. Create and duplicate creates both mirrored set and backup. TIP: For server systems, it is recommended to use a lower array block size. For multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing, a higher array block size is recommended for optimum performance The same confirmation message appears when the Auto Setup for Performance option is selected. The data on the selected disks will be destroyed. Continue? Press Y/N 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K RAID 0 for performance RAID 1 for data protection RAID 0/1 RAID SPAN for capacity RAID 1 for data protection Create only Create and duplicate Create only 3. Select task and press <Enter>. The screen returns to Create Array menu items. From this point, you may choose to auto-configure the RAID array by selecting Auto Setup for Data Security or manually configure the RAID array for mirrored sets. If you want to manually configure the RAID array continue with next step, otherwise, proceed to step #5.
5-30 Chapter 5: Software support The task Create only creates the combination of stripped and mirrored set without creating a backup. Create and duplicate creates both combination of stripped and mirrored sets with backup. 4. Select Select Disk Drives , then press <Enter>. Use arrow keys to select disk drive/s, then press <Enter> to mark selected drive. ( An asterisk is placed before a selected drive. ) 5. Select Start Create Process and press <Enter> to setup hard disk for RAID system. The following confirmation message appears: Press âYâ to confirm or âNâ to return to the configuration options. 5.4.3.3 RAID 0 1 (Safety and Performance) 1. Select the second option item Array Mode , then press the <Enter> key . The RAID system setting pop-up menu appears. 2. Select RAID 0/1 from the menu and press <Enter>. Select next task from pop-up menu. The same confirmation message appears when the Auto Setup for Data Security option is selected. The data on the selected disks will be destroyed. Continue? Press Y/N RAID 0 for performance RAID 1 for data protection RAID 0/1 RAID SPAN for capacity RAID 0/1 Create only Create and duplicate Create only 3. Select task and press <Enter>. The screen returns to Create Array menu items. From this point, you may choose to auto-configure the RAID array by selecting Auto Setup (Safe, Performance) or manually configure the RAID array for mirrored sets. If you want to manually configure the RAID array continue with next step. Screen reference on Auto Setup for Data Security can be found in step #6. 4. Select Select Disk Drives , then press <Enter>. Use arrow keys to select disk drive/s, then press <Enter> to mark selected drive.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-31 5. Select Block Size , then press <Enter> to set array block size. A list of valid array block sizes are displayed on a pop-up menu. Press âYâ to confirm or âNâ to return to the configuration options. 6. Select Start Create Process and press <Enter> to setup hard disk for RAID system. The following confirmation message appears: Use arrow keys to move selection bar on items and press <Enter> to select. TIP: For server systems, it is recommended to use a lower array block size. For multimedia computer systems used mainly for audio and video editing, a higher array block size is recommended for optimum performance The same confirmation message appears when the Auto Setup (Safe, Performance) option is selected. 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K The data on the selected disks will be destroyed. Continue? Press Y/N 5.4.3.4 RAID SP AN for capacity 1. Select the second option item Array Mode , then press the <Enter> key . The RAID system setting pop-up menu appears. RAID 0 for performance RAID 1 for data protection RAID 0/1 RAID SPAN for capacity RAID SPAN for capacity 2. Select RAID SP AN for capacity from the menu and press <Enter>. From this point, you may choose to auto-configure the RAID array by selecting Auto Setup for Capacity or manually configure the RAID array for spanned sets. If you want to manually configure the RAID array continue with next step. Screen reference on Auto Setup for Capacity can be found in step #4 3. Select Select Disk Drives , then press <Enter>. Use arrow keys to select disk drive/s, then press <Enter> to mark selected drive.( An asterisk is placed before a selected drive. )
5-32 Chapter 5: Software support 5.4.4 Delete Array 1. In the VIA RAID BIOS utility main menu, select Delete Array then press the <Enter> key . The focus is directed to the list of channel used for IDE RAID arrays. 2. Press the <Enter> key to select a RAID array to delete. The following confirmation message appears. Press âYâ to confirm or âNâ to return to the configuration options. 5.4.5 Create/Delete Spare 1. In the VIA RAID BIOS utility main menu, select Create/Delete Spare then press the <Enter> key . The focus is directed to the list of channel used for IDE RAID arrays. 2. Press the <Enter> key to select a hard disk drive to delete or used to create a spare. The following confirmation message appears. Press âYâ to confirm or âNâ to return to the configuration options. 4. Select Start Create Process and press <Enter> to setup hard disk for RAID system. The following confirmation message appears: Press âYâ to confirm or âNâ to return to the configuration options. The same confirmation message appears when the Auto Setup for Capacity option is selected. The data on the selected disks will be destroyed. Continue? Press Y/N The selected array will be destroyed. Are you sure? Continue? Press Y/N The selected drive will be destroyed. Are you sure? Continue? Press Y/N
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-33 5.4.6 Select Boot Array 1. In the VIA RAID BIOS utility main menu, select Select Boot Array then press the <Enter> key . The focus is directed to the list of channel used for IDE RAID arrays. 2. Press the <Enter> key to select a RAID array for boot. The Status of the selected array will change to Boot. Press <ESC> key to go return to menu items. Follow the same procedure to deselect the the boot array . 5.4.7 Serial Number V iew 1. In the VIA RAID BIOS utility main menu, select Serial Number View then press the <Enter> key . The focus is directed to the list of channel used for IDE RAID arrays. Move the selection bar on each item and the serial number is displayed at the bottom of the screen. This option is useful for identifying same model disks. Channelîîî Drive Nameî Array Nameî Modeî Size(GB) Status Channel0 Master î XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd Channel0 Slaveîî XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd Channel1 Masterî No Drive Channel1 Slave î No Drive VIA Tech. RAID BIOS Ver 1.00 Create Array Delete Array Create/Delete Spare Select Boot Array Serial Number View Create a RAID array with the hard disk attached to VIA IDE controller F1î : View Array/Disk Status , î : Move to next item Enter: Confirme the selection ESCî : Exit Serial Number:îîî VJF41646 Channelîîî Drive Nameîî Array Nameîî Modeî Size(GB) Status [ ] Channel0 Masterî XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd [ ]Channel0 Slaveî XXXXXXXXXXîîîî xxxxxxx xxx.xxî Hdd Channel1 Masterî No Drive Channel1 Slave î No Drive ESC î: E x it
5-34 Chapter 5: Software support 5.5 Intel ® RAID for Serial A TA configuration This motherboard supports Intel ® RAID 0 for Serial A T A drives through the Intel ® ICH5R chipset. The Serial A T A as RAID option must be enabled in the BIOS before the system can load the Intel ® RAID Option ROM code for Intel ® RAID. The Intel ® RAID Option ROM is a standard PnP (Plug and Play) option ROM that provides a pre-operating system user interface for the Intel ® RAID implementation. It also allows the boot order to be selected from within the BIOS setup utility . 5.5.2 Installing Serial A T A (SA T A) hard disks Installing Serial A T A (SA T A) hard disks requires the use of a new SA T A data cable (4-conductor) which supports the Serial A T A protocol and a SA T A power cable. Either end of the SA T A data cable can be connected to the SA T A hard disk or the SA T A connector on the motherboard. Follow the given steps for correct cable installation: 1. Attach either cable end to the SA T A connector on the motherboard. 2. Attach the other cable end to the SA T A hard disk. ⢠Both the data and power SA T A cables are new cables. Y ou cannot use older 40-pin 80-conductor IDE or regular IDE power cables with SA T A hard drives. ⢠Carefully follow any technical instructions that come from the hard disk manufacturer . 5.5.1 BIOS Configuration 1. Enter the BIOS setup program by pressing the <Del> key after the Power-On Self T est (POST) memory test begins. 2. Select the Main menu, then the IDE Configuration menu. 3. If necessary , switch the Onboard IDE Operate Mode option from [Legacy Mode] to [Enhanced Mode]. 4. Switch the Configure S-A T A as RAID option to [Y es]. 5. Press <F10> to save the BIOS settings and exit the BIOS setup program. ⢠For more information about the Intel ® RAID for SA T A configuration, refer to the Intel Application Accelerator , RAID Edition, User âs manual in â\Manual\IAA RAID Manual.docâ of the support CD. ⢠The Intel ® RAID feature is available in WinXP only .
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-35 5.5.4 Creating a RAID V olume [ HELP ] Enter a string between 1 and 16 characters in length taht can be used to uniquely identify the RAID volume. This name is case sensitive and can not contain special characters. Intel(R) Integrated RAID for Serial ATA - RAID Configuration Utility Copyright(C) 2003 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. v3.x.x.xxxx [ CREATE ARRAY MENU ] Name: RAID_Volume1 Strip Size: 64KB RAID Level: RAID0(Striping) Capacity: 37.2GB îî Create Volume [ ]-Changeî [ ]-Changeî [TAB]-Nextî [TAB]-Nextî [ESC] Previous Menuîî [ESC] Previous Menuîî [Enter]-Select [Enter]-Select 5.5.3 Creating, Deleting, and Resetting RAID Sets The Serial A T A RAID set must be configured in the RAID Configuration utility . This configuration can be done by the Intel ® RAID Option ROM. During the Power-On Self T est (POST), the following message will appear for a few seconds: Press <Ctrl-I> to enter Raid Configuration Utility . After this message appears, press the <Ctrl> and <I> keys simultaneously , the following screen menu appears. [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None defined. Non-RAID Disks: Port Drive Modelîî Serial #îî Sizeîî Statusîî Bootable 0 ST320413Aîîî xxxxxxxxîî 18.6GBî Normalîî Yes 1 ST320413Aîîî xxxxxxxxîî 18.6GBî Normalîî Yes Intel(R) Integrated RAID for Serial ATA - RAID Configuration Utility Copyright(C) 2003 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. v3.x.x.xxxx [ MAIN MENU ] 1.î Create RAID Volume 2.î Delete RAID Volume 3.î Reset Disks to Non-RAID 4.î Exit [ ]-Selectîî [ ]-Selectîî [ESC] Exitîî [ESC] Exitîî [Enter]-Select Menu [Enter]-Select Menu Follow the given steps to create a RAID 0 V olume 1. Select option 1 Create RAID V olume and press the <Enter> key .
5-36 Chapter 5: Software support 2. Select the stripe value for the RAID 0 array by scrolling through the available values by using the Up and Down arrow keys and pressing the <Enter> key . 3. The available values range from 8 KB to 128 KB increments. The strip value should be chosen based on the planned drive usage. Some suggested selections are listed below . The default selection is 64 KB. ⢠16 KB - low disk usage ⢠64 KB - typical disk usage ⢠128 KB - performance disk usage 4. Press the <Enter> key again to the Create V olume prompt to create the array . Confirm this selection by pressing the <Y> key after the prompt. Are you sure you want to create this volume (Y/N) 5. Scroll to option 4 Exit and press the <Enter> key to exit the RAID configuration utility . Confirm the exit by pressing <Y> key . 5.5.5 Deleting a RAID V olume [ HELP ] Deleting a volume will destroy the volume data on the drive(s) and cause any member disks to become available as non-RAID disks. WARNING: îEXISTING DATA WITHING THIS VOLUME WILL BE LOST AND NON-RECOVERABLE Intel(R) Integrated RAID for Serial ATA - RAID Configuration Utility Copyright(C) 2003 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. v3.x.x.xxxx [ DELETE ARRAY MENU ] [ ]-Changeî [ ]-Changeî [TAB]-Nextî [TAB]-Nextî [<ESC>]-Previous Menuî [<ESC>]-Previous Menuî [<DEL>]-Delete Volume [<DEL>]-Delete Volume Nameîîî Levelîî Drives î Capacityî Statusîî Bootable RAID_Volume1î RAID0(Stripe)î 2îî 37.2GB î Normal îî Yes T ake caution in using this option; All data on the RAID drives will be lost!
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-37 5.5.6 Reset RAID Data 1. Select option 3 Reset RAID Data and press the <Enter> key to delete the RAID set and remove any RAID structures from the drives. [ DISK/VOLUME INFORMATION ] RAID Volumes: None defined. Non-RAID Disks: Port Drive Modelîî Serial #îî Sizeîî Statusîî Bootable 0 ST320413Aîîî xxxxxxxxîî 18.6GBî Normalîî Yes 1 ST320413Aîîî xxxxxxxxîî 18.6GBî Normalîî Yes Intel(R) Integrated RAID for Serial ATA - RAID Configuration Utility Copyright(C) 2003 Intel Corporation. All Rights Reserved. v3.x.x.xxxx [ MAIN MENU ] 1.î Create RAID Volume 2.î Delete RAID Volume 3.î Reset Disks to Non-RaID 4.î Exit [ ]-Selectîî [ ]-Selectîî [ESC] Exitîî [ESC] Exitîî [Enter]-Select Menu [Enter]-Select Menu 2. Confirm the volume deletion by pressing the <Y> key . T ake caution in using this option; All data on the RAID drives and any internal RAID structures will be lost! Resetting all RAID data will remove any internal RAID structures from all RAID disks, including disks with working volumes. These structures are used to maintain the RAID volumes. By removing these structures, the drive will revert back to a Non-RAID disk that can then be used or reallocated to a new RAID volume. [ RESET ALL DATA RAID DATA ] WARNING: Selecting "Yes" will cause all data on any RAID disk (RAID Volume or Other RAID Disk) to be lost. Are you sure you want to destroy all RAID data (Y/N): 1. Select option 2 Delete RAID V olume and press the <Enter> key to delete the RAID set. 2. Press the <Delete> key to delete the RAID volume. Are you sure you want to delete this volume? ALL DATA IN THE VOLUME WILL BE LOST!! Are you sure you want to delete volume "RAID_Volume1"? (Y/N) [ VOLUME DELETE VERIFICATION ] 3. Confirm the volume deletion by pressing the <Y> key .
5-38 Chapter 5: Software support Write-protect the floppy disk to avoid computer virus infection. 5.6 Using Intel ® / VIA ® Makedisk.exe Important Notes 1. The Makedisk.exe utility enables you to create a floppy disk with the RAID driver necessary when configuring RAID installations. 2. The Makedisk.exe utility for Intel ® RAID is located in â/Drivers/chipset/IAA/Makedisk.exeâ of the support CD. 3. The Makedisk.exe utility for VIA ® RAID is located in â/Drivers/VIARAID/Makedisk.exeâ of the support CD. The Makedisk.exe utility for Intel ® RAID is supported in Windows ® XP⢠only . 4. During OS installation, press the âF6â key and insert the created driver floppy disk to upload RAID driver . A floppy disk with VIA ® RAID driver is required when installing Windows ® XPâ¢/ 2000⢠or NT⢠operating systems. Make sure to create a RAID driver floppy disk using Makedisk.exe utility for VIA ® RAID function before installing your operating system.
ASUS P4P800 Deluxe motherboard user guide 5-39 5.7 Mar vell ® Vir tual Cable T ester⢠(VCT) T echnology The P4P800 Deluxe motherboard supports the Marvell ® V irtual Cable T ester (VCT) T echnology . The VCT virtually diagnose and report cable faults using the T ime Domain Reflectometry (TDR). With this essential tool, installation and network diagnosis have never been easier . The VCT technology detects and reports open and shorted cables with up to 1 meter of accuracy . It also detects impedance mismatches, pair swaps, pair polarity problems and pair skew problems of up to 64ns. VCT remarkably reduces networking and support costs, complementing a highly manageable and controlled network system. Also, this tool can be incorporated in the network systems software making it ideal for field support as well as development diagnostics. Using the V irtual Cable T ester⢠1. Right click on the My Computer icon on your desktop, on the pop- up menu, click on Properties to display the System Properties dialog box. 2. Locate Network adapters and select 3COM Gigabit LOM (3C940) from the list. Click on the P roperties button. 3. From the 3Com Gigabit LOM (3C940) Properties dialogue box, select the Diagnostics tab.
5-40 Chapter 5: Software support 4. Click on the (VCT) V irtual Cable T ester button. The following screen display appears. 5. Click on Run to execute test. ⢠The V irtual Cable T ester⢠(VCT) feature is supported in Windows ® XP⢠and Windows ® 2000⢠operating systems only . ⢠The Run button on the VCT T ester dialogue box is disabled if no problem is detected on the network.